Post on 07-Jul-2018
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 1/740
TSCM60_1
SAP ERP Salesand
Distribution I -Part 1
Publication ID:
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 2/740
Course Overview
Unit 1: Enterprise Structures in Sales and DistributionUnit 2: Overview of Sales Processes
Unit 3: Master Data in Sales and Distribution
Unit 4: Automatic Data Determination and Shipment Scheduling
Unit 5: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution
Unit 6: Availability Check
Unit 7: Sales Documents - Basic Technical Background
Unit 8: Special Processes in Sales and Distribution
Unit 9: Complaints Processing
Unit 10: Lists and Analytics for Sales and Distribution Processes
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 3/740
Unit 11: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution
Unit 12: Sales Order Processing
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 4/740
Unit 1: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution
Lesson 1: Using Enterprise Structures for Sales and Distribution in SAP ERP
Lesson 2: Demonstrating the Use of SAP ERP Enterprise Structures
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 5/740
Lesson 1: Using Enterprise Structures for Sales andDistribution in SAP ERP
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Explain enterprise structures for sales and distribution processing in SAP ERP
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 6/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 1: Organizational Units in Sales andDistribution
Unit 1 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 7/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 2: Organizational Unit - Company Code Unit 1 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 8/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 3: Organizational Unit - Sales Organization Unit 1 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 9/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 4: Organizational Unit - DistributionChannel
Unit 1 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 10/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 5: Organizational Unit - Division Unit 1 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 11/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 6: Organizational Unit - Sales Area Unit 1 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 12/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 7: Organizational Units - Plant and StorageLocation
Unit 1 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 13/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 8: Organizational Unit - Shipping Point Unit 1 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 14/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures
.If you want to execute certain tasks within sales and distribution processes, you have toknow about the relevant organizational structures. Some of these elements are usedwithin sales and distribution processes only; others are also relevant to other processesand applications.
Name organizational units in Sales and Distribution.
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 15/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures
.Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent a sales facility or a sales subsidiary?
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 16/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures
.Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent a means to ship goods to thecustomer (for example, factory sales, wholesale trade, or retail trade)?
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 17/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures
.Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent different product lines and to groupmaterials (for example, vehicles, accessories, or spare parts)?
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 18/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures
.Which organizational unit can you use in the system to organize and process outbound deliveries atdifferent locations (for example, loading ramp or rail depot)?
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 19/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Identify overall organizational units.
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 20/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures.A corporate group can be divided up into several companies or subsidiaries. Which organizational unitcan you use in financial accounting to represent a legal entity and an independent accounting unit inthe system?
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 21/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures.In a company, you can manufacture and store materials in different places. Which organizational unitcan you use in the system to represent a production facility or a distribution center?
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 22/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Within a plant, material storage can be divided up according to various locations or rooms. Whichorganizational unit can you use in the system to represent such a location or room?
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 23/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Assignments of organizational units.
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 24/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Which organizational units does a sales area consist of?
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 25/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Determine whether this statement is true or false.
"A distribution channel can be assigned to multiple salesorganizations. "
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 26/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Determine whether this statement is true or false.
"Multiple distribution channels can be assigned to a salesorganization. "
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
TSCM60 1 U i 1 E i 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 27/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures.To which organizational unit is a sales organization assigned in order to represent the connection ofsales and distribution processes to financial accounting?
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
TSCM60 1 U i 1 E i 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 28/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Determine whether this statement is true or false.
"A sales organization can be assigned to multiple companycodes. "
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
TSCM60 1 U it 1 E i 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 29/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Determine whether this statement is true or false.
"Multiple delivering plants can be assigned to a salesorganization. "
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
TSCM60 1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 30/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures.To which organizational unit do you assign a shipping point?
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
TSCM60 1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 31/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Determine whether this statement is true or false.
"A shipping point can be assigned to multiple plants. "
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
TSCM60 1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 32/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures.To which organizational unit are storage locations assigned?
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
TSCM60 1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 33/740
Exercise 1: Explain Organizational Structures.
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 1
TSCM60 1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 34/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.If you want to execute certain tasks within sales and distribution processes, you have toknow about the relevant organizational structures. Some of these elements are usedwithin sales and distribution processes only; others are also relevant to other processesand applications.
Name organizational units in Sales and Distribution.
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
TSCM60 1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 35/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent a sales facility or a sales subsidiary?.Sales organization
_
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 36/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent a means to ship goods to thecustomer (for example, factory sales, wholesale trade, or retail trade)?.Distribution channel
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 37/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Which organizational unit can you use in the system to represent different product lines and to groupmaterials (for example, vehicles, accessories, or spare parts)?.Division
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 38/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Which organizational unit can you use in the system to organize and process outbound deliveries atdifferent locations (for example, loading ramp or rail depot)?.Shipping point
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 39/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Identify overall organizational units.
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 40/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.A corporate group can be divided up into several companies or subsidiaries. Which organizational unitcan you use in financial accounting to represent a legal entity and an independent accounting unit inthe system?.Company code
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 41/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.In a company, you can manufacture and store materials in different places. Which organizational unitcan you use in the system to represent a production facility or a distribution center?.Plant
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 42/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Within a plant, material storage can be divided up according to various locations or rooms. Whichorganizational unit can you use in the system to represent such a location or room?.Storage location
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 43/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Assignments of organizational units.
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 44/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Which organizational units does a sales area consist of?.A sales area consists of one sales organization, one distribution channel, and one division.
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 45/740
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 46/740
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 47/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.To which organizational unit is a sales organization assigned in order to represent the connection ofsales and distribution processes to financial accounting?.The sales organization is assigned to a company code.
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 48/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Determine whether this statement is true or false.
"A sales organization can be assigned to multiple companycodes. "
False
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 49/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Determine whether this statement is true or false.
"Multiple delivering plants can be assigned to a salesorganization. "
True
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 50/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.To which organizational unit do you assign a shipping point?.The shipping point is assigned to a plant.
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 51/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.Determine whether this statement is true or false.
"A shipping point can be assigned to multiple plants. "True
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 52/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.To which organizational unit are storage locations assigned?.Storage locations are assigned to the plant.
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 53/740
Solution 1: Explain Organizational Structures.
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 54/740
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Explain enterprise structures for sales and distribution processing in SAP ERP
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 55/740
Lesson 2: Demonstrating the Use of SAP ERP EnterpriseStructures
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Use an example company to demonstrate the use of SAP ERP enterprise structures for
sales and distribution
TSCM60_1 Figure 9: Sample Company - Subsidiaries andSales Organizations
Unit 1 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 56/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 10: Sample Company - Sales Areas Unit 1 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 57/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 11: Sample Company - Distribution Unit 1 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 58/740
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 59/740
Exercise 2: Check the Organizational Structures for Sales andDistribution of an Example Company.The example company is a globally operating group. It sells materials belonging todifferent product lines (for example, motorcycles and spare parts). These materials aredistributed by several sales facilities using multiple distribution channels.
Organizational structures in the training system
1. In the system, each sales document has to be assigned to exactly one salesorganization. Check which sales organizations exist and make a note of threeexamples whose names include USA .
Hint:You can get a list of the sales organizations in the transaction for creating salesorders. The transaction can be found using the following menu path: Logistics >Sales and Distribution > Sales > Order > Create.
____________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 60/740
Exercise 2: Check the Organizational Structures for Sales andDistribution of an Example Company
.________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Now check which distribution channels are assigned to sales organization 1000.Write down three examples.
Hint:You can check this on the entry screen of the transaction for creating salesorders too.
____________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Exercise 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 61/740
Exercise 2: Check the Organizational Structures for Sales andDistribution of an Example Company
.3. Now check which divisions exist for sales organization 1000 and for distribution
channel 12. Write down three examples.
Hint:Use the entry screen of the transaction for creating of sales orders again.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 62/740
Solution 2: Check the Organizational Structures for Sales andDistribution of an Example Company
.The example company is a globally operating group. It sells materials belonging todifferent product lines (for example, motorcycles and spare parts). These materials aredistributed by several sales facilities using multiple distribution channels.
Organizational structures in the training system
1. In the system, each sales document has to be assigned to exactly one salesorganization. Check which sales organizations exist and make a note of threeexamples whose names include USA .
Hint:You can get a list of the sales organizations in the transaction for creating salesorders. The transaction can be found using the following menu path: Logistics >Sales and Distribution > Sales > Order > Create.
____________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 63/740
Solution 2: Check the Organizational Structures for Sales andDistribution of an Example Company
.________________________________________________________________________________________
a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Place the cursor on the input field for the sales organization and display thepossible values using the F4 help.
c) Some examples of sales organizations in the USA are:
Sales organization Text
3000 USA Philadelphia3020 USA DenverR300 Retail USA
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 64/740
Solution 2: Check the Organizational Structures for Sales andDistribution of an Example Company
.Sales organization Text
S300 Services USA
2. Now check which distribution channels are assigned to sales organization 1000.Write down three examples.
Hint:You can check this on the entry screen of the transaction for creating salesorders too.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 65/740
Solution 2: Check the Organizational Structures for Sales andDistribution of an Example Company
.a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter sales organization 1000 in the corresponding field.
c) Place the cursor on the input field for the distribution channel and display the
possible values using the F4 help.
d) Valid values for distribution channels that are assigned to sales organization1000:
Distribution channel Text
01 Direct sales
10 Final customer sales12 Sold for resale
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 66/740
Solution 2: Check the Organizational Structures for Sales andDistribution of an Example Company
.Distribution channel Text
14 Service16 Factory sales
3. Now check which divisions exist for sales organization 1000 and for distributionchannel 12. Write down three examples.
Hint:Use the entry screen of the transaction for creating of sales orders again.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 67/740
Solution 2: Check the Organizational Structures for Sales andDistribution of an Example Company
.a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 12 on the entry screen.
c) Place the cursor on the input field for the division and display the possible
values using the F4 help.
d) Some examples of divisions assigned to sales organization 1000 anddistribution channel 12:
Division Text
00 Cross-division
02 Motorcycles04 Lighting
TSCM60_1 Unit 1 Solution 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 68/740
Solution 2: Check the Organizational Structures for Sales andDistribution of an Example Company
.Division Text
07 High tech08 Service10 Vehicles
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 69/740
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Use an example company to demonstrate the use of SAP ERP enterprisestructures for sales and distribution
Unit 2: Overview of Sales Processes
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 70/740
Lesson 1: Executing Sales and Distribution Processes
Lesson 2: Processing Sales Documents
Lesson 3: Processing Outbound Deliveries
Lesson 4: Shipping Goods
Lesson 5: Processing Billing Documents
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 71/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 12: Presales Activities Unit 2 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 72/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 13: Sales Order Processing Unit 2 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 73/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 14: Procurement Unit 2 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 74/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 15: Shipping Unit 2 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 75/740
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 76/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 17: Payment Unit 2 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 77/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 18: Process overview Unit 2 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 78/740
Procedure: To execute sales and distribution processes
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 79/740
Procedure: To execute sales and distribution processesTo execute a sales and distribution process from the sales order to the billing document,
you could perform the following steps:1. Create the sales order using transaction VA01.
2. Create the outbound delivery with reference to the sales order using transactionVL01N.
3. Create the transfer order using transaction LT03.
4. Post the goods issue for the outbound delivery using transaction VL02N.
5. Create the billing document using transaction VF01.
Note:
The transactions mentioned are only examples. The system offers many more transactions tocreate the particular documents within a sales and distribution process (for example,collective processing).
TSCM60_1 Figure 19: Document Flow in the System Unit 2 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 80/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 20: Document Flow at Item Level Unit 2 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 81/740
Procedure: To use the document flow to monitor a sales and
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 82/740
distribution process
To view the document flow of a particular sales and distribution process, you can startfrom any document. If you start with the sales order, you can perform the following steps:
1. Start the transaction to display (VA03) or change (VA02) the sales order.
2. Enter the order number in the corresponding field.
3. Call the document flow by choosing Environment > Display document flow .
The way to display the document flow from the other documents (for example, thedelivery or billing document) is very similar.
Summary
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 83/740
yYou should now be able to:
● Explain the sales and distribution process flow● Explain the usage of the document flow within sales and distribution processes
Lesson 2: Processing Sales Documents
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 84/740
g
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Create a sales order
● Display a sales order
TSCM60_1 Figure 21: Creating an Order Unit 2 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 85/740
Exercise 3: Create a sales order
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Exercise 3
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 86/740
.In many cases, the sales process begins with the customer ordering materials from youand telling you his requested delivery date. Using this information, you can enter a salesorder.
1. Create a standard order using the following information:
Field name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-To Party T-S50A##
Purchase Order Number 4-2##Requested Delivery Date in 10 days
Exercise 3: Create a sales order
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Exercise 3
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 87/740
.Save the order and write down the document number.____________________________________________
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 88/740
Solution 3: Create a sales order
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 3
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 89/740
.Save the order and write down the document number.____________________________________________
a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the values for the order type, sales organization, distribution channel,
and division on the initial screen of the transaction.c) Press ENTER to navigate to the order details.
d) Enter the sold-to party, purchase order number, and requested delivery dateon the overview screen.
e) Press ENTER to confirm your entries.
f) Enter the material data.
Solution 3: Create a sales order
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 3
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 90/740
. g) Press ENTER to confirm your entries.
h) Choose Sales document > Save . The document number is assigned internallyby the system.
i) Close the transaction and return to the SAP Easy Access menu.
TSCM60_1 Figure 22: Sales Document Structure Unit 2 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 91/740
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 92/740
Exercise 4: Display a sales order
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Exercise 4
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 93/740
.____________________________________________
5. What is the overall processing status for the sales order?____________________________________________
Solution 4: Display a sales order
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 4
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 94/740
.Display an existing sales order to familiarize yourself with the structure of a salesdocument.
1. Display the sales order you entered previously. Write down the payment terms ofthe sales order header.____________________________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Display .
b) On the initial screen of the transaction, enter the number of the sales order youcreated previously.
c) Press ENTER.
d) The value of the payment terms is ZB 1 . You can find it on the Sales tab page.
2. From which plant will item 10 be delivered?____________________________________________
Solution 4: Display a sales order
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 4
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 95/740
.a) You can find the corresponding plant on the right-hand side of the Sales tab
page, or on the Procurement tab page. The plant for item 10 is 1 .
3. What is the net price for item 10 and item 20?
Item Net price
10
20
a) You can find the net price per item by scrolling to the right on the Sales tabpage.
4. What is the delivery date in the schedule line for item 10?____________________________________________
a) Double-click on item 10 to reach the item details.
Solution 4: Display a sales order
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 4
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 96/740
.b) On the Schedule lines tab page, you can find the delivery date for the schedule
line. It corresponds to the requested delivery date of the order, which is in 1days .
5. What is the overall processing status for the sales order?____________________________________________
a) Position the cursor on a header field of the sales order, for example, the ordernumber.
b) Choose Environment > Display document flow .
c) The status of the sales order is open , since no follow-up document has beencreated so far.
SummaryY h ld b bl t
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 97/740
You should now be able to:
● Create a sales order● Display a sales order
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 98/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 23: Creating an Outbound Delivery Unit 2 Lesson 3
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 99/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 24: Structure of Delivery Documents Unit 2 Lesson 3
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 100/740
Exercise 5: Create an outbound delivery
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Exercise 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 101/740
.Outbound deliveries are the basic documents for planning and executing the variousshipping activities within sales and distribution processes. You will now create anoutbound delivery with reference to an existing sales order.
1. Create an outbound delivery with reference to a sales order using the followinginformation:Field Name Value
Shipping point Z0##Selection date in 20 daysOrder Order that you used in the previous
exercise
2. Switch to the Picking tab page and record the delivery quantity and pickingquantity for the two items.
Exercise 5: Create an outbound delivery
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Exercise 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 102/740
.Item Delivery quantity Picked quantity
10
20
3. Save the outbound delivery and record the document number.____________________________________________
4. What is the overall processing status for the sales order?
Hint:You will find the overall processing status in the outbound delivery documentflow.
____________________________________________
5. What is the overall processing status of the outbound delivery?
Exercise 5: Create an outbound delivery.
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Exercise 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 103/740
.____________________________________________
6. Before the materials leave the plant and the goods issue is posted, display thestock situation for material T-AS1## in plant 1000.
Hint:Open a new session to trace the stocks during the next exercises.
Record how many pieces are in unrestricted use.____________________________________________
Solution 5: Create an outbound delivery.
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 104/740
.Outbound deliveries are the basic documents for planning and executing the variousshipping activities within sales and distribution processes. You will now create anoutbound delivery with reference to an existing sales order.
1. Create an outbound delivery with reference to a sales order using the followinginformation:
Field Name Value
Shipping point Z0##Selection date in 20 daysOrder Order that you used in the previous
exercise
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Outbound Delivery > Create > Single Document >With Reference to Sales Order .
Solution 5: Create an outbound delivery.
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 105/740
b) Enter the shipping point, the selection date, and the order number on the initialscreen of the transaction.
c) Press ENTER to navigate to the document.
2. Switch to the Picking tab page and record the delivery quantity and pickingquantity for the two items.
Item Delivery quantity Picked quantity
10
20
a) Select the Picking tab page. The correct values are:
3. Save the outbound delivery and record the document number.____________________________________________
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 106/740
Solution 5: Create an outbound delivery.
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 107/740
5. What is the overall processing status of the outbound delivery?____________________________________________
a) You can also see the status of the outbound delivery within the document flow.The status of the delivery is open .
6. Before the materials leave the plant and the goods issue is posted, display thestock situation for material T-AS1## in plant 1000.
Hint:Open a new session to trace the stocks during the next exercises.
Record how many pieces are in unrestricted use.____________________________________________
a) Start a new session.
Solution 5: Create an outbound delivery.
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 108/740
b) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Materials Management >Inventory Management > Environment > Stock > Stock Overview .
c) Enter the selection criteria and choose Execute or press F8 .
d) There are 1 pieces in unrestricted use in plant 1000.
SummaryYou should now be able to:
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 109/740
●
Create an outbound delivery
Lesson 4: Shipping Goods
Lesson Objectives
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Lesson 4
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 110/740
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Pick goods
● Post goods issue
TSCM60_1 Figure 25: Picking Unit 2 Lesson 4
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 111/740
Exercise 6: Pick goods.B f h d i h di i l h b i k d f
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Exercise 6
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 112/740
Before you can post the goods issue, the corresponding materials have to be picked fromthe warehouse. You now create a transfer order to realize the picking in SAP ERP.
1. Create a transfer order for an outbound delivery using the following information:Field Name Value
Warehouse Number 010Delivery Delivery that you created in the
preceding exerciseForeground/Background Background
Record the transfer order number.____________________________________________
2. Display the outbound delivery and check the picked quantities.
Exercise 6: Pick goods.
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Exercise 6
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 113/740
Item Picked quantity
10
20
Solution 6: Pick goods.B f t th g d i th di g t i l h t b i k d f
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 6
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 114/740
Before you can post the goods issue, the corresponding materials have to be picked from
the warehouse. You now create a transfer order to realize the picking in SAP ERP.
1. Create a transfer order for an outbound delivery using the following information:
Field Name Value
Warehouse Number 010Delivery Delivery that you created in the
preceding exerciseForeground/Background Background
Record the transfer order number.____________________________________________
Solution 6: Pick goods.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 6
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 115/740
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Shipping and Transportation > Picking > Create Transfer Order > SingleDocument .
b) Enter the field values listed above and press ENTER.
c) The transfer order is created and the document number is displayed at thebottom of the screen.
2. Display the outbound delivery and check the picked quantities.
Item Picked quantity
10
20
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Outbound Delivery > Display .
Solution 6: Pick goods.
b) Select the Picking tab page The picked quantities are:
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 6
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 116/740
b) Select the Picking tab page. The picked quantities are:
Item Picked quantity10 1020 20
TSCM60_1 Figure 26: Posting Goods Issue Unit 2 Lesson 4
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 117/740
Exercise 7: Post goods issue.You post the goods issue to document that the material has left the plant and to update
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Exercise 7
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 118/740
You post the goods issue to document that the material has left the plant and to update
the stock and corresponding values.
1. Post the goods issue for the outbound delivery that you used in the precedingexercise.
2. Once the materials have left the plant and the goods issue has been posted,display the stocks for material T-AS1## in plant 1000 again.
Hint:Switch to your second session where the stock overview is still open, and chooseRefresh . If you have closed the second session, choose Logistics > MaterialsManagement > Inventory Management > Environment > Stock > Stock Overview .
Record how many pieces are still available for unrestricted use.____________________________________________
Exercise 7: Post goods issue.
3. What is the overall processing status for the outbound delivery?
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Exercise 7
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 119/740
3. What is the overall processing status for the outbound delivery?
____________________________________________
4. Which documents assigned to the outbound delivery can you see in the documentflow?________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Why is the status of the outbound delivery still Being processed ?________________________________________________________________________________________
Solution 7: Post goods issue.You post the goods issue to document that the material has left the plant and to update
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 7
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 120/740
You post the goods issue to document that the material has left the plant and to update
the stock and corresponding values.1. Post the goods issue for the outbound delivery that you used in the preceding
exercise.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Post Goods Issue > Outbound Delivery Single
Document .b) Enter the number of the relevant outbound delivery and choose Post Goods
Issue .
2. Once the materials have left the plant and the goods issue has been posted,display the stocks for material T-AS1## in plant 1000 again.
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 121/740
Solution 7: Post goods issue.
b) Enter the number of the outbound delivery.
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 7
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 122/740
) y
c) Choose Environment > Document Flow . The status of the outbound delivery isBeing processed .
4. Which documents assigned to the outbound delivery can you see in the documentflow?________________________________________________________________________________________
a) You will find the transfer order for picking and the material document of thegoods issue listed in the document flow.
5. Why is the status of the outbound delivery still Being processed ?________________________________________________________________________________________
Solution 7: Post goods issue.
a) The subsequent billing document has not yet been created for the outbound
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 7
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 123/740
delivery. Where the processes are relevant for billing, the document retains thestatus In process until the billing document is created.
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Pick goods
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 124/740
● Pick goods
● Post goods issue
Lesson 5: Processing Billing Documents
Lesson Objectives
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Lesson 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 125/740
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Create a billing document
● Post an incoming payment
TSCM60_1 Figure 27: Creating a Billing Document Unit 2 Lesson 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 126/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 28: Billing Document Structure Unit 2 Lesson 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 127/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 29: Effects of Billing Document Unit 2 Lesson 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 128/740
Exercise 8: Create a billing document.You create a billing document with reference to an outbound delivery to invoice the
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Exercise 8
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 129/740
relevant amounts to the customer.1. Create the billing document for the outbound delivery from the previous task.
Write down the document number. ____________________________________________
2. In the billing document header, check to which company code the data has beenposted in Financial Accounting.
____________________________________________3. Display the accounting document for the billing document, and write down the
accounts to which postings have been made.________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________
Exercise 8: Create a billing document.
4. Display the document flow for the billing document. What is the overall processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Exercise 8
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 130/740
status for the outbound delivery?____________________________________________
5. What is the overall processing status for the accounting document?____________________________________________
Solution 8: Create a billing document.You create a billing document with reference to an outbound delivery to invoice the
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 8
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 131/740
relevant amounts to the customer.1. Create the billing document for the outbound delivery from the previous task.
Write down the document number. ____________________________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Billing > Billing Document > Create .
b) Enter the number of the outbound delivery in the Document field (the systemmay propose the number automatically) and choose Billing Document > Save .
c) The document number is assigned internally by the system and displayed atthe bottom of the screen.
2. In the billing document header, check to which company code the data has beenposted in Financial Accounting.____________________________________________
Solution 8: Create a billing document.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 8
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 132/740
Billing > Billing Document > Display .b) Enter the number of the billing document in the corresponding field and press
ENTER.
c) Choose Goto > Header > Header .
d) The corresponding company code 1 is displayed on the tab page.
3. Display the accounting document for the billing document, and write down theaccounts to which postings have been made.________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________a) From the billing document, choose Goto > Accounting overview .
Solution 8: Create a billing document.
b) In the dialog box, double-click the accounting document.
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 8
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 133/740
c) Postings have been made to the following accounts: customer accountMotomarket Heidelberg (account T-S5 A## ), domestic sales revenue peritem (account 8 ), and output tax (account 175 ).
4. Display the document flow for the billing document. What is the overall processingstatus for the outbound delivery?
____________________________________________a) From the billing document, choose Environment > Display document flow .
b) The status of the outbound delivery is Completed .
5. What is the overall processing status for the accounting document?
____________________________________________a) Within the document flow of the billing document, you can see that the status
of the accounting document is Not cleared .
TSCM60_1 Figure 30: Incoming Payment Unit 2 Lesson 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 134/740
Exercise 9: Post incoming payment.When the customer has paid the invoice you can post the corresponding incoming
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Exercise 9
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 135/740
payment.1. First, reproduce the invoiced amount that the customer had to pay. The customer
has paid punctually and, therefore, justifiably claimed the cash discount. Make anote of the respective pricing conditions that you can find in the billing documentheader:Name of pricing condition Condition value
Price
Output Tax
Cash Discount
2. Post the incoming payment using the following information:Field Name Value
Document Date today's date
Exercise 9: Post incoming payment.
Field Name Value
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Exercise 9
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 136/740
Company Code 1000Posting Date today's dateCurrency EURAccount (Bank data) 100009Amount 1,280.40
Account (Open item selection) T-S50A##
3. Finally, display the document flow for the billing document again.What is the overall processing status for the accounting document?____________________________________________
Solution 9: Post incoming payment.When the customer has paid the invoice you can post the corresponding incoming
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 9
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 137/740
payment.1. First, reproduce the invoiced amount that the customer had to pay. The customer
has paid punctually and, therefore, justifiably claimed the cash discount. Make anote of the respective pricing conditions that you can find in the billing documentheader:
Name of pricing condition Condition value
Price
Output Tax
Cash Discount
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Billing > Billing Document > Display .
Solution 9: Post incoming payment.
b) Enter the number of the billing document and press ENTER.
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 9
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 138/740
c) Choose Goto > Header > Pricing conditions header .
d) Here you can find the corresponding values:
Name of pricing condition Condition value
Price EUR 1,200.00
Output Tax EUR 120.00Cash Discount EUR 39.60
2. Post the incoming payment using the following information:
Field Name Value
Document Date today's dateCompany Code 1000
Solution 9: Post incoming payment.
Field Name Value
i d d
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 9
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 139/740
Posting Date today's dateCurrency EURAccount (Bank data) 100009Amount 1,280.40Account (Open item selection) T-S50A##
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Accounting > Financial Accounting > Accounts Receivable > Document entry > Incoming Payments .
b) Enter the listed field values and press ENTER.
c) Choose Document > Post .
3. Finally, display the document flow for the billing document again.What is the overall processing status for the accounting document?
Solution 9: Post incoming payment.
____________________________________________
) F h SAP E A h L i i S l d Di ib i
TSCM60_1 Unit 2 Solution 9
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 140/740
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Billing > Billing Document > Display .
b) Enter the number of the billing document and choose Environment > Displaydocument flow .
c) The status of the accounting document is Cleared .
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Create a billing document
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 141/740
● Post an incoming payment
Unit 3: Master Data in Sales and Distribution
Lesson 1: Maintaining Customer Master Data
Lesson 2: Maintaining Material Master Data
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 142/740
Lesson 3: Maintaining Customer-Material Info Records
Lesson 4: Maintaining Condition Master Data for Pricing
Lesson 5: Master Data - Explaining Additional Topics
Lesson 1: Maintaining Customer Master Data
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson you will be able to:
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 143/740
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Create customer master data
● Change customer master data
TSCM60_1 Figure 31: Origin of Data in Sales Documents Unit 3 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 144/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 32: Structure of Customer Master Data Unit 3 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 145/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 33: Customer Master Sales Area Data Unit 3 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 146/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 34: Partner Functions in the CustomerMaster
Unit 3 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 147/740
Exercise 10: Create Customer Master Data.A new customer wants to place an order and buy some materials. Therefore, you create amaster record for the customer.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 10
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 148/740
1. Create the customer master record using the following information:Field Name Value
Account group 0001 Sold-to partyCustomer (number) 234##
Company code 1000Sales organization 1000Distribution channel 12Division 00
Address data:
Exercise 10: Create Customer Master Data.
Field Name Value
Name Miller
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 10
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 149/740
Name MillerSearch term SCM600-##Street Main Street 12Postal code 20111City Hamburg
Country GermanyTransportation zone Region NorthLanguage Language of the course
Control data:
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 150/740
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 151/740
Solution 10: Create Customer Master Data.A new customer wants to place an order and buy some materials. Therefore, you create amaster record for the customer.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 10
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 152/740
1. Create the customer master record using the following information:
Field Name Value
Account group 0001 Sold-to partyCustomer (number) 234##
Company code 1000Sales organization 1000Distribution channel 12Division 00
Address data:
Solution 10: Create Customer Master Data.
Field Name Value
Name Miller
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 10
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 153/740
Search term SCM600-##Street Main Street 12Postal code 20111City Hamburg
Country GermanyTransportation zone Region NorthLanguage Language of the course
Control data:
Solution 10: Create Customer Master Data.
Field Name Value
VAT Reg. No. DE##1234567
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 10
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 154/740
Company code data:Field Name Value
Reconciliation account 140000
Sales area data:Field Name Value
Customer group Trading CompaniesShipping condition ## Standard (corresponds to screen
number + 50)
Delivering plant 1000Incoterms CFR Hamburg
Solution 10: Create Customer Master Data.
Field Name Value
Terms of payment ZB00 Payable immediately due netl f bl f
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 10
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 155/740
Tax classification Liable for tax
Save the customer master record.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Master Data > Business Partner > Customer > Create > Complete .
b) On the initial screen, enter the account group, the customer number, and therelevant organizational units.
c) Press ENTER to call the detailed screens.
d) Maintain the data as listed and save the customer master record.
2. For the previously created customer master record, write down which values aremaintained for the mandatory partner functions.
Solution 10: Create Customer Master Data.
Field Name Value
Sold-to partyh
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 10
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 156/740
Ship-to party
Bill-to party
Payer
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Master Data > Business Partner > Customer > Display > Sales and Distribution .
b) Enter the customer number and the relevant sales area (the fields shouldalready be filled automatically).
c) Press ENTER to call the customer master record.
d) Choose Goto > Sales area data .
Solution 10: Create Customer Master Data.
e) Find the relevant values on the Partner Functions tab page.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 10
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 157/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 35: Effects of Customer Master DataChanges
Unit 3 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 158/740
Exercise 11: Enhance a Customer Master Record.A customer informs you that an additional ship-to party is required for future deliveries.To facilitate order processing, you store the additional ship-to party in the customermaster of the sold-to party. Then you create a sales order for your customer.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 11
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 159/740
1. Change the customer master record of the sold-to party from the previousexercise. In the sales area data, add another ship-to party using the followinginformation:Field Name Value
Customer 234##Sales organization 1000Distribution channel 12Division 00Additional ship-to party T-S50B##
2. Create a sales order for the customer using the following information:
Exercise 11: Enhance a Customer Master Record.
Field Name Value
Order type ORSales organization 1000
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 11
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 160/740
Sales organization 1000Distribution channel 12Division 00Sold-to party 234##
Ship-to party T-S50B##Purchase order number 5-411Requested delivery date In 10 days
3. In the sales order, the system proposes the Incoterms that are maintained in the
customer master record. However, for this order, the Incoterms FOB Hamburgshould apply. Change the Incoterms accordingly.
Exercise 11: Enhance a Customer Master Record.
4. Does the change affect the customer master record?____________________________________________
5 Save the order and write down the order number
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 11
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 161/740
5. Save the order and write down the order number.____________________________________________
Solution 11: Enhance a Customer Master Record.A customer informs you that an additional ship-to party is required for future deliveries.To facilitate order processing, you store the additional ship-to party in the customermaster of the sold-to party. Then you create a sales order for your customer.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 11
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 162/740
1. Change the customer master record of the sold-to party from the previousexercise. In the sales area data, add another ship-to party using the followinginformation:
Field Name Value
Customer 234##Sales organization 1000Distribution channel 12Division 00Additional ship-to party T-S50B##
Solution 11: Enhance a Customer Master Record.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Master Data > Business Partner > Customer > Change > Sales and Distribution .
b) Enter the customer number and the organizational data on the initial screen.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 11
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 163/740
) g
c) Press ENTER to call the customer master record.
d) Choose Goto > Sales area data .
e) Add the additional ship-to party on the Partner Functions tab page.f) Save the master record.
2. Create a sales order for the customer using the following information:
Field Name Value
Order type ORSales organization 1000
Solution 11: Enhance a Customer Master Record.
Field Name Value
Distribution channel 12Division 00
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 11
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 164/740
Sold-to party 234##Ship-to party T-S50B##Purchase order number 5-411
Requested delivery date In 10 days
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Fill the relevant fields on the initial screen and press ENTER to call the sales
order.c) Maintain the information as listed above.
Solution 11: Enhance a Customer Master Record.
3. In the sales order, the system proposes the Incoterms that are maintained in thecustomer master record. However, for this order, the Incoterms FOB Hamburgshould apply. Change the Incoterms accordingly.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 11
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 165/740
a) Change the Incoterms on the Sales tab page.
4. Does the change affect the customer master record?____________________________________________
a) No. The data that is copied from the customer master into the order can beoverwritten, if necessary. The customer master record remains unchanged.
5. Save the order and write down the order number.____________________________________________
a) Choose Sales document > Save .
Exercise 12: Change a Customer Master Record.Some data has to be changed for a particular customer. You make the changes in thecustomer master record and check the consequences for the existing sales orders.
1. Change a customer master record using the following information:
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 12
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 166/740
Field Name Value
Customer 234##Sales organization 1000
Distribution channel 12Division 00
Data to be changed:Field Name Value
Street Sun Street 43
Exercise 12: Change a Customer Master Record.
Field Name Value
Terms of payment ZB02
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 12
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 167/740
2. Save your changes.
3. Check the address of the sold-to party in the sales order that you createdpreviously. Did it change after you changed the customer master record?____________________________________________
4. Check the payment terms in the sales order. Did they change after you changedthe customer master?____________________________________________
Solution 12: Change a Customer Master Record.Some data has to be changed for a particular customer. You make the changes in thecustomer master record and check the consequences for the existing sales orders.
1. Change a customer master record using the following information:
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 12
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 168/740
Field Name Value
Customer 234##Sales organization 1000
Distribution channel 12Division 00
Data to be changed:Field Name Value
Street Sun Street 43
Solution 12: Change a Customer Master Record.
Field Name Value
Terms of payment ZB02
) F h SAP E A h L i i S l d Di ib i
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 12
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 169/740
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Master Data > Business Partner > Customer > Change > Sales and Distribution .
b) Enter the customer number and the organizational data on the entry screen ofthe transaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the master record.
d) The field values can be changed on the following tab pages:
Field Name Area Tab page
Street General data Address
Solution 12: Change a Customer Master Record.
Field Name Area Tab page
Terms of payment Sales area data Billing Documents
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 12
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 170/740
2. Save your changes.
a) Choose Customer > Save .
3. Check the address of the sold-to party in the sales order that you created
previously. Did it change after you changed the customer master record?____________________________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Display .
b) Enter the order number and press ENTER to call the order details.
c) You can find the address on the overview screen of the order. It has changed inaccordance with the customer master data.
Solution 12: Change a Customer Master Record.
4. Check the payment terms in the sales order. Did they change after you changedthe customer master?____________________________________________
) I th l d fi d th t t th i f th
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 12
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 171/740
a) In the sales order, you find the payment terms on the overview screen of theorder. They have not changed. The new terms of payment in the customermaster only become effective when you create new sales orders. If required,you would have to change them manually in the existing sales order.
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 172/740
Exercise 13: Display a Customer Master Record.
4. How can you display a list of orders for the customer from the customer master?________________________________________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 13
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 173/740
5. Can you maintain various addresses for the sold-to party in multiple companycodes in the customer master record?____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Solution 13: Display a Customer Master Record.Display the previously entered customer master record for customer Miller.
1. How can you check the sales areas for which the customer record has beenmaintained in the system?
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 13
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 174/740
________________________________________________________________________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Master Data > Business Partner > Customer > Display > Sales and Distribution .
b) Enter the customer number.
c) Choose Customer’s sales areas .
2. How can you check when and by whom the customer master was created in thesystem?________________________________________________________________________________________
Solution 13: Display a Customer Master Record.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Master Data > Business Partner > Customer > Display > Complete .
b) Enter the customer number and press ENTER to call the master record.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 13
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 175/740
c) Choose Extras > Administrative Data.
3. How can you check how, when, and by whom which fields in the customer masterwere changed in the system?
________________________________________________________________________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Master Data > Business Partner > Customer > Display > Complete .
b) Enter the customer number and press ENTER to call the master record.
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 176/740
Solution 13: Display a Customer Master Record.
c) Choose Environment > List Documents > Orders.
d) Enter the selection criteria and press ENTER.5. Can you maintain various addresses for the sold-to party in multiple company
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 13
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 177/740
codes in the customer master record?________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________a) No. The address of the sold-to party is maintained independently of the
organizational units.
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 178/740
Lesson 2: Maintaining Material Master Data
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Create material master data
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 179/740
● Create material master data
● Explain division-specific and cross-division sales
TSCM60_1 Figure 36: Material Master Data Unit 3 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 180/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 37: Material Master Data for Sales and
Distribution
Unit 3 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 181/740
Exercise 14: Create a Material Master Record.You have added a new material to your product range and create the correspondingmaterial master record. You also want to post goods receipts to the stock for this
material, and sell it using a sales order.
1. The new material is a headlight, similar to the existing material T-AS1## . To make
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 182/740
1. The new material is a headlight, similar to the existing material T AS1## . To makeit easier to enter data for the new material master record, you can use the materialT-AS1## as a reference.Create the new material master record using the following data (apart from this
data, the material has the same features as those proposed by the system for thereference material T-AS1##).
Note:Maintain the views Basic Data 1 , Sales:Sales Org. Data 1 , Sales: General/PlantData , Sales Text and Accounting 1 .
Exercise 14: Create a Material Master Record.
Field Name Value
Material (leave the field empty)Industry sector RetailMaterial type Trading goods
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 183/740
Material type Trading goodsCopy from material T-AS1##Plant 1000Sales organization 1000Distribution channel 12
Hint:Use the listed organizational units for the reference material too.
Exercise 14: Create a Material Master Record.
Field Name Value
Material description (short text) Headlight 'Simple'Minimum order quantity 10 piecesMinimum delivery quantity 5 pieces
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 184/740
y q y pSales price EUR 20 per piece
Hint:You can navigate to the price master record by choosing Conditions on the Sales:Sales Org. 1 tab page.
Field Name Value
Sales text 'Material is fragile!'
Price control S
Exercise 14: Create a Material Master Record.
Field Name ValueStandard price 10
2. Save the material master record and write down the material number.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 185/740
____________________________________________
3. You are informed that some pieces have already been delivered for the newheadlight. Post the corresponding goods receipt using the following information:Field Name Value
Movement type 561Plant 1000Storage Location 0001Material Number of your new material
Exercise 14: Create a Material Master Record.
Field Name ValueQuantity 200
Hi t
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 186/740
Hint:Choose the menu path Logistics > Materials Management > InventoryManagement > Goods Movement > Goods Receipt > Other to post the goods issue.
4. A customer orders the new material. Create the corresponding sales order usingthe following information:Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000
Distribution Channel 12
Exercise 14: Create a Material Master Record.
Field Name ValueDivision 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 5-1311
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 187/740
Requested delivery date in 10 daysMaterial Number of your new materialOrder quantity 10 pieces
5. Save the order and write down the order number._____________________________________
6. You want to sell your materials through several sales organizations. Is it possible tomaintain multiple sales units in the material master according to the salesorganization and the distribution channel?__________________________________________________________
Exercise 14: Create a Material Master Record.
7. You want to deliver your materials from various plants. Is it possible to maintainmultiple loading groups in the material master according to the plant?
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 188/740
8. Is it possible to maintain multiple minimum order quantities in the material masteraccording to the division?__________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________
Solution 14: Create a Material Master Record.You have added a new material to your product range and create the correspondingmaterial master record. You also want to post goods receipts to the stock for this
material, and sell it using a sales order.
1. The new material is a headlight, similar to the existing material T-AS1## . To make
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 189/740
it easier to enter data for the new material master record, you can use the materialT-AS1## as a reference.Create the new material master record using the following data (apart from this
data, the material has the same features as those proposed by the system for thereference material T-AS1##).
Note:Maintain the views Basic Data 1 , Sales:Sales Org. Data 1 , Sales: General/PlantData , Sales Text and Accounting 1 .
Solution 14: Create a Material Master Record.
Field Name Value
Material (leave the field empty)Industry sector RetailMaterial type Trading goods
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 190/740
Copy from material T-AS1##Plant 1000Sales organization 1000Distribution channel 12
Hint:Use the listed organizational units for the reference material too.
Solution 14: Create a Material Master Record.
Field Name Value
Material description (short text) Headlight 'Simple'Minimum order quantity 10 piecesMinimum delivery quantity 5 pieces
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 191/740
Sales price EUR 20 per piece
Hint:You can navigate to the price master record by choosing Conditions on the Sales:Sales Org. 1 tab page.
Field Name Value
Sales text 'Material is fragile!'
Price control S
Solution 14: Create a Material Master Record.
Field Name Value
Standard price 10
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Master Data > Products > Material > Trading Goods > Create.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 192/740
Master Data Products Material Trading Goods Create.
b) Enter the industry sector and the number for the reference material.
c) Press ENTER to call the view selection.
d) Select the relevant views.
e) Press ENTER to call the Organizational Levels dialog box.
f) Enter the relevant organizational units and include them in the Copy from areatoo.
Solution 14: Create a Material Master Record.
g) Press ENTER to call the selected views of the material master record.
h) Maintain the field values as listed in the exercise.
2. Save the material master record and write down the material number.____________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 193/740
____________________________________________
a) In the material master record, choose Save . The material number is assignedinternally by the system.
3. You are informed that some pieces have already been delivered for the newheadlight. Post the corresponding goods receipt using the following information:
Field Name Value
Movement type 561Plant 1000
Storage Location 0001
Solution 14: Create a Material Master Record.
Field Name Value
Material Number of your new materialQuantity 200
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 194/740
Hint:Choose the menu path Logistics > Materials Management > InventoryManagement > Goods Movement > Goods Receipt > Other to post the goods issue.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Materials Management >Inventory Management > Goods Movement > Goods Receipt > Other .
b) Enter the movement type, the plant, and the storage location on the initialscreen of the transaction.
Solution 14: Create a Material Master Record.
c) Press ENTER to call the screen where you can enter the materials andquantities for the goods receipt.
d) Enter the material number and the quantity.
e) Choose Post .
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 195/740
4. A customer orders the new material. Create the corresponding sales order usingthe following information:
Field Name ValueOrder Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00
Sold-to party T-S50A##
Solution 14: Create a Material Master Record.
Field Name Value
Purchase order number 5-1311Requested delivery date in 10 daysMaterial Number of your new material
d
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 196/740
Order quantity 10 pieces
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Sales > Order > Create .b) Maintain the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Maintain the relevant data.
5. Save the order and write down the order number.
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 197/740
Solution 14: Create a Material Master Record.
a) Yes. In the material master, there are various ways to maintain multiple fields,such as the loading group, depending on the plant.
8. Is it possible to maintain multiple minimum order quantities in the material masteraccording to the division?
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 14
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 198/740
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) No. It is not possible to maintain field values in the material master data
depending on the division. A division can be uniquely assigned to a material.
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 199/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 39: Division-Specific Sales Unit 3 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 200/740
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Create material master data
● Explain division-specific and cross-division sales
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 201/740
Lesson 3: Maintaining Customer-Material Info Records
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Create a customer-material info record
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Lesson 3
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 202/740
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 203/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 41: Order Entry Using Customer-MaterialInfo Records
Unit 3 Lesson 3
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 204/740
Exercise 15: Create a Customer-Material Info Record.Some major customers usually order materials using their own material numbers. Tofacilitate sales order processing, you use the customer-material information master data.
1. One of your major customers orders materials using their own material numbers.Create a customer-material info record using the following data:Field Name Value
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 15
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 205/740
Customer T-S50A##Sales Organization 1000
Distribution Channel 12Material number T-AS1##Customer material number K-4711-##Customer material description Headlight 4711
2. The customer now places an order for the first time using their own materialnumber. Create the corresponding sales order using the following information:
Exercise 15: Create a Customer-Material Info Record.
Field Name Value
Order Type OR
Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 15
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 206/740
Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 5-1911Requested delivery date in 10 daysCustomer material number K-4711-##Order quantity 10 pieces
3. Save the order and write down the order number.
_____________________________________
Exercise 15: Create a Customer-Material Info Record.
4. Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order using the followinginformation:
Field Name ValueShipping Point Z0##Selection Date in 20 days
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 15
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 207/740
Order The order number of your last order
5. Save the outbound delivery and write down the order number.____________________________________________
6. Is the customer material number available on the delivery note?
Solution 15: Create a Customer-Material Info Record.Some major customers usually order materials using their own material numbers. Tofacilitate sales order processing, you use the customer-material information master data.
1. One of your major customers orders materials using their own material numbers.Create a customer-material info record using the following data:
Field Name Value
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 15
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 208/740
Customer T-S50A##Sales Organization 1000
Distribution Channel 12Material number T-AS1##Customer material number K-4711-##Customer material description Headlight 4711
Solution 15: Create a Customer-Material Info Record.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Master Data > Agreements > Customer Material Information > Create .
b) Enter the customer number and the organizational data on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to call the details of the master record.
d) E t th t i l b i th fi t l f th fi t t li
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 15
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 209/740
d) Enter the material number in the first column of the first empty line.
e) Select the line and choose Info Record Details (F2) .
f) Maintain the further information.
g) Choose Save .
2. The customer now places an order for the first time using their own materialnumber. Create the corresponding sales order using the following information:
Solution 15: Create a Customer-Material Info Record.
Field Name Value
Order Type OR
Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 15
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 210/740
Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 5-1911Requested delivery date in 10 daysCustomer material number K-4711-##Order quantity 10 pieces
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Sales > Order > Create .
Solution 15: Create a Customer-Material Info Record.
b) Enter the order type and the organizational data on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Enter the relevant field values.
3 Save the order and write down the order number
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 15
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 211/740
3. Save the order and write down the order number._____________________________________
a) In the sales order, choose Save .4. Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order using the following
information:
Field Name Value
Shipping Point Z0##
Selection Date in 20 days
Solution 15: Create a Customer-Material Info Record.
Field Name Value
Order The order number of your last order
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Outbound Delivery > Create > Single Document >With Reference to Sales Order .
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 15
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 212/740
b) Enter the field values on the initial screen of the transaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the details of the delivery.
5. Save the outbound delivery and write down the order number.____________________________________________
a) In the outbound delivery, choose Save .
6. Is the customer material number available on the delivery note?
Solution 15: Create a Customer-Material Info Record.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Outbound Delivery > Display .
b) Enter the delivery number (do not press ENTER).
c) Choose Outbound Delivery > Issue Delivery Output .
d) Select the line with the message type LD00
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 15
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 213/740
d) Select the line with the message type LD00.
e) Choose Print Preview .
f) The customer material number is available on the delivery note.
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Create a customer-material info record
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 214/740
Lesson 4: Maintaining Condition Master Data for Pricing
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Create condition master data
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Lesson 4
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 215/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 42: Condition Master Data Unit 3 Lesson 4
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 216/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 43: Condition Master Records in Pricing Unit 3 Lesson 4
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 217/740
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 218/740
Exercise 16: Create a Condition Master Record (Sales Price).You have to define certain price agreements for some major customers. Since thesecustomers place orders frequently, they should receive lower prices for some materials,depending on the quantity ordered.Since it is not necessary to enter these agreements every time you create an order, youwant to use the automatic pricing function in the system and create the appropriatecondition master data.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 16
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 219/740
1. Create a condition master record using the following information:Field Name Value
Condition Type PR00Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Customer T-S50A##Material T-AS1##
Exercise 16: Create a Condition Master Record (Sales Price).
The price for the material should depend on the order quantity. Therefore maintainthe following price scale:Scale quantity Amount
1 piece EUR 29 per piece10 pieces EUR 28 per piece100 pieces EUR 27 per piece
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 16
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 220/740
2. After saving the price agreement with the major customer in the system, youreceive another order. Create a sales order based on the following information:Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00
Exercise 16: Create a Condition Master Record (Sales Price).
Field Name ValueSold-to party T-S50A##
Purchase order number 5-2311Requested delivery date in 10 daysMaterial T-AS1##Order Quantity 20 pieces
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 16
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 221/740
Order Quantity 20 pieces
3. During order entry, you want to make sure that the automatic pricing function hasdetermined the correct prices for material T-AS1##.Which price per piece was determined by the system?_______________________________________
4. Save the order and write down the order number.
______________________________________
Solution 16: Create a Condition Master Record (Sales Price).You have to define certain price agreements for some major customers. Since thesecustomers place orders frequently, they should receive lower prices for some materials,depending on the quantity ordered.Since it is not necessary to enter these agreements every time you create an order, youwant to use the automatic pricing function in the system and create the appropriatecondition master data.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 16
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 222/740
1. Create a condition master record using the following information:
Field Name Value
Condition Type PR00Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Customer T-S50A##Material T-AS1##
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 223/740
Solution 16: Create a Condition Master Record (Sales Price).
e) Enter the organizational units, the customer number, and the material number.
f) Press ENTER to confirm your entries.
g) Select the line in which you entered the material number.
h) Choose Goto > Scales .
i) Maintain the price scale
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 16
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 224/740
i) Maintain the price scale.
j) Choose Condition > Save .
2. After saving the price agreement with the major customer in the system, youreceive another order. Create a sales order based on the following information:
Field Name Value
Order Type OR
Sales Organization 1000
Solution 16: Create a Condition Master Record (Sales Price).
Field Name Value
Distribution Channel 12
Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 5-2311Requested delivery date in 10 days
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 16
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 225/740
Requested delivery date in 10 daysMaterial T-AS1##
Order Quantity 20 pieces
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the organizational information and the order type on the initial screen of
the transaction.
Solution 16: Create a Condition Master Record (Sales Price).
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Maintain the relevant information in the sales order.
3. During order entry, you want to make sure that the automatic pricing function hasdetermined the correct prices for material T-AS1##.Which price per piece was determined by the system?
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 16
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 226/740
_______________________________________
a) In the sales order, select item 10.
b) Choose Goto > Item > Conditions .
c) The system has determined a price of EUR 28 per piece.
4. Save the order and write down the order number.______________________________________
a) In the sales order, choose Sales document > Save .
Solution 16: Create a Condition Master Record (Sales Price).
The document number is assigned internally by the system.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 16
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 227/740
Exercise 17: Create a Condition Master Record (Discount).You have to maintain a specific discount for a customer. Depending on the value of anorder item, the customer should be granted a percentage discount.
1. Create a condition master record using the following information: You have agreedwith customer T-S5 A## that, from now on , they are to be granted a percentagediscount for all materials, depending on the item value.Field Name Value
C di i T K007
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 17
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 228/740
Condition Type K007Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Customer T-S50A##
Maintain the following discount scale:
Exercise 17: Create a Condition Master Record (Discount).
Scale value Amount
EUR 100 -1%
EUR 500 -2%EUR 1,000 -3%
2. Your customer places the next order. Create the corresponding sales order basedth f ll i i f ti
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 17
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 229/740
on the following information:Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##
Exercise 17: Create a Condition Master Record (Discount).
Field Name ValuePurchase order number 5-2511
Requested delivery date in 10 daysMaterial T-AS1##Order Quantity 10 pieces
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 17
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 230/740
3. During order entry, you want to make sure that the automatic pricing function hasdetermined the correct discount.Which customer discount was determined by the system?_______________________________________
4. Save the order and write down the order number.______________________________________
Solution 17: Create a Condition Master Record (Discount).You have to maintain a specific discount for a customer. Depending on the value of anorder item, the customer should be granted a percentage discount.
1. Create a condition master record using the following information: You have agreedwith customer T-S5 A## that, from now on , they are to be granted a percentagediscount for all materials, depending on the item value.
Field Name Value
Condition Type K007
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 17
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 231/740
Condition Type K007Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Customer T-S50A##
Maintain the following discount scale:
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 232/740
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 233/740
Solution 17: Create a Condition Master Record (Discount).
Field Name Value
Requested delivery date in 10 days
Material T-AS1##Order Quantity 10 pieces
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 17
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 234/740
b) Enter the organizational information and the order type on the initial screen ofthe transaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Maintain the relevant information in the sales order.
3. During order entry, you want to make sure that the automatic pricing function hasdetermined the correct discount.
Solution 17: Create a Condition Master Record (Discount).
Which customer discount was determined by the system?_______________________________________
a) In the sales order, select your item.b) Choose Goto > Item > Conditions .
c) The system has determined the customer discount K007 (-1%) based on thecorresponding master record.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 17
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 235/740
p g
4. Save the order and write down the order number.______________________________________
a) In the sales order, choose Sales document > Save .The document number is assigned internally by the system.
Exercise 18: Understand the Background of Condition MasterData.Questions on condition master data in pricing.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 18
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 236/740
Exercise 18: Understand the Background of Condition MasterData.Which condition master data categories (4) can be used in pricing?
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 18
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 237/740
Exercise 18: Understand the Background of Condition MasterData.You want to sell your materials through multiple distribution channels. Is it possible to maintain theprices in the condition master in different ways according to the distribution channel?
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 18
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 238/740
Exercise 18: Understand the Background of Condition MasterData.You have entered a sales order. By doing so, prices were determined by the automatic pricingfunction. Can you change the prices manually when entering the order?
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 18
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 239/740
Exercise 18: Understand the Background of Condition MasterData.During sales order processing, you use various divisions. However, you always want to use the samecondition master data for all divisions. To avoid unnecessary maintenance of condition master datafor multiple divisions, you would like to configure the system in such a way that the condition masterdata of division 00 is also valid for divisions 01 and 02. Is this possible?
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 18
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 240/740
Exercise 18: Understand the Background of Condition MasterData.Is it possible to make these settings for frequently used customer and material master data as well?
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 18
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 241/740
Solution 18: Understand the Background of Condition MasterData.Questions on condition master data in pricing.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 18
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 242/740
Solution 18: Understand the Background of Condition MasterData.Which condition master data categories (4) can be used in pricing?.Prices, surcharges/discounts, freights, taxes.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 18
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 243/740
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 244/740
Solution 18: Understand the Background of Condition MasterData.You have entered a sales order. By doing so, prices were determined by the automatic pricingfunction. Can you change the prices manually when entering the order?
.Yes. Usually, during order entry, you can overwrite the price manually. However, it ispossible to restrict this by making the relevant settings in Customizing or in the conditionrecord.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 18
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 245/740
Solution 18: Understand the Background of Condition MasterData.During sales order processing, you use various divisions. However, you always want to use the samecondition master data for all divisions. To avoid unnecessary maintenance of condition master data
for multiple divisions, you would like to configure the system in such a way that the condition masterdata of division 00 is also valid for divisions 01 and 02. Is this possible?.Yes. In Customizing, you can set up division 00 as a representative division and referencedivisions 01 and 02 to it. In this way, the condition master data of division 00 is also valid
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 18
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 246/740
for divisions 01 and 02.
Solution 18: Understand the Background of Condition MasterData.Is it possible to make these settings for frequently used customer and material master data as well?.For customer master data, it is possible to configure frequently used master data for thedivisions. For material master data, this is only possible for distribution channels, sincethe division in the material master is not used as an organizational unit where thedependent material master data would be maintained.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 18
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 247/740
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Create condition master data
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 248/740
Lesson 5: Master Data - Explaining Additional Topics
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Display output master data
● Explain the concept of common master data
● Complete incomplete documents
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Lesson 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 249/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 45: Relevance of Output Master Data Unit 3 Lesson 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 250/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 46: Common Master Data - DistributionChannels
Unit 3 Lesson 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 251/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 47: Common Master Data - Divisions Unit 3 Lesson 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 252/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 48: Incompletion Log Unit 3 Lesson 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 253/740
Exercise 19: Handle Incomplete Sales Documents.Sales documents are sometimes incomplete after creation (due to incomplete masterdata, for example). Therefore, you have to know how incomplete sales documents can beidentified and completed. You will now create an incomplete sales order and then perform
the necessary steps to complete it.1. Create a sales order using the following information:
Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Exercise 19
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 254/740
Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Material T-AS1##Order quantity 10
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 255/740
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 256/740
Solution 19: Handle Incomplete Sales Documents.Sales documents are sometimes incomplete after creation (due to incomplete masterdata, for example). Therefore, you have to know how incomplete sales documents can beidentified and completed. You will now create an incomplete sales order and then perform
the necessary steps to complete it.1. Create a sales order using the following information:
Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 19
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 257/740
Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Material T-AS1##
Solution 19: Handle Incomplete Sales Documents.
Field Name Value
Order quantity 10
Ensure that the purchase order number field remains empty and remove theautomatically determined plant from item 10.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen of the
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 19
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 258/740
b) Enter the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Maintain the field values on the overview screen.
Solution 19: Handle Incomplete Sales Documents.
Hint:When the warning message concerning the purchase order number appears,press ENTER to continue.
e) Navigate to the Shipping tab page.
f) Remove the field value for the plant.
2. Save the incomplete sales order and write down the order number.
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 19
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 259/740
______________________________________________________a) Within the sales order, choose Sales Document > Save .
b) A dialog box appears, asking if you want to save the order even though it isincomplete. Choose Save .
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 260/740
Solution 19: Handle Incomplete Sales Documents.
b) Ensure that your user ID is maintained in the Created By field.
c) Choose Program > Execute to start the selection.
d) Your incomplete order is displayed in the list.
5. Complete the sales order using the following information:
Field Name Value
Purchase order number 3-991Delivering plant 1000
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 19
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 261/740
Delivering plant 1000
a) In the list of incomplete orders, select the line with your incomplete order.
b) Choose Goto > Edit incompletion to navigate to the incompletion log.
c) Select the line with the PO number in the list of missing data.
Solution 19: Handle Incomplete Sales Documents.
d) Choose Edit > Complete data .
e) Enter the purchase order number in the respective field.
f) Choose Goto > Back to navigate to the incompletion log again. As you can see,the purchase order number is no longer listed as missing data.
g) Select the line with the Plant in the list of missing data.
h) Choose Edit > Complete data .
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 19
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 262/740
i) Enter the plant in the respective field. j) Choose Goto > Back to navigate to the incompletion log again. Instead of
displaying the incompletion log again, the system states that the document iscomplete.
6. Save the sales order again.
Solution 19: Handle Incomplete Sales Documents.
a) In the sales order, choose Sales Document > Save . By doing so, you willautomatically navigate back to the list of incomplete orders.
7. Try to create the outbound delivery a second time. Is it possible now?______________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Outbound Delivery > Create > Single Document >With Reference to Sales Order .
b) Enter the shipping point Z0## and the selection date (today in 10 days) on the
TSCM60_1 Unit 3 Solution 19
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 263/740
b) Enter the shipping point Z0## and the selection date (today in 10 days) on theinitial screen of the transaction.
c) Press ENTER to create the outbound delivery.
d) The system can now create the outbound delivery. You do not have to save thedocument.
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Display output master data
● Explain the concept of common master data
● Complete incomplete documents
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 264/740
Unit 4: Automatic Data Determination and ShipmentScheduling
Lesson 1: Analysing the Results of Automatic Data Determination
Lesson 2: Analysing the Results of Delivery and Transportation Scheduling
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 265/740
Lesson 1: Analysing the Results of Automatic DataDetermination
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Check the results of automatic data determination
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 266/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 49: Determining the Delivering PlantAutomatically
Unit 4 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 267/740
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 268/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 51: Determining the Shipping PointAutomatically
Unit 4 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 269/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 52: Route Structure Unit 4 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 270/740
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 271/740
Exercise 20: Check the Results of Automatic DataDetermination.When you create sales orders, some important field values can be determinedautomatically by the system. You will create a sales order and verify the automatic
determination of the relevant shipping points and transportation routes.1. Create a sales order using the following information:
Field Name Value
Order Type ZA##Sales Organization 1000
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Exercise 20
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 272/740
Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50B##Purchase order number 6-111
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 273/740
Exercise 20: Check the Results of Automatic DataDetermination.
______________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________
4. From which master data source does the value for the delivering plant in item 10come?___________________________________________
5. Which shipping points have been automatically determined for both items of thel d ?
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Exercise 20
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 274/740
sales order?Item 10: ___________________________________________Item 20: ___________________________________________
6. The system uses 3 criteria to determine the shipping point. What are they?___________________________________________
Exercise 20: Check the Results of Automatic DataDetermination.
______________________________________________________________________________________
7. Which values for the 3 criteria have been used to automatically determine theshipping point for item 10?________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Exercise 20
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 275/740
8. Which routes have been determined for both items?Item 10: ___________________________________________Item 20: ___________________________________________
9. Save the order and write down the document number._______________________________________________
Solution 20: Check the Results of Automatic DataDetermination.When you create sales orders, some important field values can be determinedautomatically by the system. You will create a sales order and verify the automatic
determination of the relevant shipping points and transportation routes.1. Create a sales order using the following information:
Field Name Value
Order Type ZA##Sales Organization 1000
Di t ib ti Ch l 12
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 20
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 276/740
Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50B##Purchase order number 6-111
Solution 20: Check the Results of Automatic DataDetermination.
Field Name Value
Requested delivery date in 10 days
Material Order Quantity
T-AS1## 7T-AS2## 8
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 20
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 277/740
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Maintain the relevant fields.
Solution 20: Check the Results of Automatic DataDetermination.
2. Which delivering plants have been automatically determined for both items?Item 10: ___________________________________________
Item 20: ___________________________________________a) In the sales order, you can find the field values that were determined for the
delivering plants on the Sales tab page. Plant 1000 has been determined forboth items.
3. When determining the correct value for the delivering plant, the system checks 3
master data sources in which the delivering plant can be specified What are these
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 20
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 278/740
master data sources in which the delivering plant can be specified. What are thesesources?_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Solution 20: Check the Results of Automatic DataDetermination.
a) The customer-material information record, the customer master record of theship-to party, and the material master record.
4. From which master data source does the value for the delivering plant in item 10come?___________________________________________
a) You do not want to leave the order now, so choose System > Create Session tostart a new session.
b) From the SAP Easy Access menu of the new session choose Logistics > Sales
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 20
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 279/740
b) From the SAP Easy Access menu of the new session, choose Logistics > Salesand Distribution > Master Data > Agreements > Customer Material Information >Display .
c) Enter customer T-S50B##, sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12,and material T-AS1##.
Solution 20: Check the Results of Automatic DataDetermination.
d) Choose Execute (F8) to start the selection. The system is unable to find acorresponding master record, so the value for the delivering plant is not taken
from a customer-material information record.e) To check the next option, go back to the session in which you still have the
sales order on the screen.
f) Choose Environment > Display Ship To Party .
g) On the Shipping tab page in the Sales Area Data 1000 is maintained as relevantdelivering plant
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 20
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 280/740
delivering plant.
5. Which shipping points have been automatically determined for both items of thesales order?Item 10: ___________________________________________Item 20: ___________________________________________
Solution 20: Check the Results of Automatic DataDetermination.
a) In the sales order, choose the Shipping tab page. The shipping point Z0## hasbeen determined for both items.
6. The system uses 3 criteria to determine the shipping point. What are they?_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) The system can determine the shipping point of a sales order item by using thedelivering plant shipping conditions and loading group as criteria
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 20
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 281/740
delivering plant, shipping conditions, and loading group as criteria.
7. Which values for the 3 criteria have been used to automatically determine theshipping point for item 10?________________________________________________________________________________________________
Solution 20: Check the Results of Automatic DataDetermination.
________________________________________________
a) You can find the relevant delivering plant for item 10 on the Sales tab page of
the sales order. It is delivering plant 1000.
b) To check the shipping conditions, choose Goto > Header > Shipping within thesales order. The shipping condition equals ## Standard. The code for theshipping condition is ##+5 (60 for group 10, for example).
c) Choose Goto > Back to navigate back to the overview screen of the sales order.
d) S l i 10
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 20
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 282/740
d) Select item 10.
e) Choose Environment > Display material to navigate to the material masterrecord.
f) Choose the Sales: General/Plant tab page. The relevant value for the loading
group is 3 .
Solution 20: Check the Results of Automatic DataDetermination.
8. Which routes have been determined for both items?Item 10: ___________________________________________
Item 20: ___________________________________________a) The automatically determined routes can also be found on the Shipping tab
page. Route R00030 applies for both items.
9. Save the order and write down the document number._______________________________________________
a) Within the sales order choose Sales Document > Save The document number
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 20
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 283/740
a) Within the sales order, choose Sales Document > Save . The document numberis assigned internally by the system.
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Check the results of automatic data determination
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 284/740
Lesson 2: Analysing the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Check the results of delivery and transportation scheduling
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 285/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 54: Backward Scheduling Unit 4 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 286/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 55: Forward Scheduling Unit 4 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 287/740
Exercise 21: Check the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling.When entering an order, you would like to check if the requested delivery date can be met.If the requested delivery date cannot be confirmed, the customer is offered the firstpossible delivery date.You now check on which dates the individual work stages for shipping and transportationprocessing must begin for the ordered products to get to the customer on time.
1. Create a sales order using the following information:Field Name Value
Order Type ORS l O i ti 1000
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Exercise 21
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 288/740
Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##
Exercise 21: Check the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling.
Field Name ValuePurchase order number 6-411
Requested delivery date in 10 days
Material Order quantity Ship-to party
T-AS1## 5 T-S50A##T-AS3## 1 T-S50B##
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Exercise 21
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 289/740
Hint:To maintain the different ship-to-party for the second item, branch to the itemdetails and choose the Partners tab page. Overwrite the automaticallydetermined partner for the ship-to party with the ship-to party specified above.
Exercise 21: Check the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling.
Allow the system to redetermine the plant and the shipping point when thecorresponding pop-up appears.
2. Determine the shipping dates for the confirmed schedule line of item 10 and writethem down.Field Name Value
Delivery date
Goods issue date
Loading date
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Exercise 21
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 290/740
Transportation planning date
3. Save the order and write down the document number._______________________________________________
Exercise 21: Check the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling.
4. Which of the steps for shipping and transportation processing must be completedso that loading can be performed on the determined loading date?________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Hint:You can use the F1 help to call information about the tasks and the use ofdifferent dates in delivery and transportation scheduling.
5 To check the effects of your delivery and transportation scheduling you now
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Exercise 21
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 291/740
5. To check the effects of your delivery and transportation scheduling, you nowcreate an outbound delivery with reference to the last sales order. Use thefollowing information:Field Name Value
Shipping point Z0##
Exercise 21: Check the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling.
Field Name ValueSelection date today
Order order number of the last order
Can the outbound delivery be created?______________________________________________
6. Try to create the outbound delivery again using the material availability date of one
of the items of your order as the selection date. Can you deliver the order now?
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Exercise 21
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 292/740
____________________________________________________________Do NOT save the outbound delivery.
Exercise 21: Check the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling.
Hint:If you have accidentally saved the outbound delivery, delete the deliverydocument with the transaction:
Logistics > Sales and Distribution > Shipping and Transportation > OutboundDelivery > Change > Single Document. Enter the number of the outbound deliveryin the respective field and choose Outbound Delivery > Delete .
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Exercise 21
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 293/740
Solution 21: Check the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling.When entering an order, you would like to check if the requested delivery date can be met.If the requested delivery date cannot be confirmed, the customer is offered the firstpossible delivery date.You now check on which dates the individual work stages for shipping and transportationprocessing must begin for the ordered products to get to the customer on time.
1. Create a sales order using the following information:
Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 21
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 294/740
Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##
Solution 21: Check the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling.
Field Name Value
Purchase order number 6-411
Requested delivery date in 10 days
Material Order quantity Ship-to party
T-AS1## 5 T-S50A##T-AS3## 1 T-S50B##
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 21
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 295/740
Hint:To maintain the different ship-to-party for the second item, branch to the itemdetails and choose the Partners tab page. Overwrite the automaticallydetermined partner for the ship-to party with the ship-to party specified above.
Solution 21: Check the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling.
Allow the system to redetermine the plant and the shipping point when thecorresponding pop-up appears.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational data on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Maintain the relevant information on the overview screen of the sales order.
e) Double click item 20 to navigate to the item details
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 21
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 296/740
e) Double-click item 20 to navigate to the item details.
f) Choose the Partners tab page.
g) In the Partner column, change the ship-to party as requested.
Solution 21: Check the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling.
h) Press ENTER to confirm the change of the ship-to party.
i) Confirm the two information messages by pressing ENTER.
j) In the Adjust item pop-up, click on Redetermine to allow the system toredetermine the plant and the shipping point for the item.
2. Determine the shipping dates for the confirmed schedule line of item 10 and writethem down.
Field Name Value
Delivery date
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 21
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 297/740
Goods issue date
Loading date
Transportation planning date
Solution 21: Check the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling.
a) In the sales order, double-click item 10 to navigate to the item details.
b) Navigate to the Schedule lines tab page.
c) Select the second schedule line with the confirmed quantity of 5 pieces.
d) Click the Shipping button below the schedule lines. The different dates aredisplayed here.
3. Save the order and write down the document number.
_______________________________________________a) In the sales order choose Sales Document > Save The document number is
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 21
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 298/740
a) In the sales order, choose Sales Document > Save . The document number isassigned internally by the system.
4. Which of the steps for shipping and transportation processing must be completedso that loading can be performed on the determined loading date?
Solution 21: Check the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Hint:You can use the F1 help to call information about the tasks and the use ofdifferent dates in delivery and transportation scheduling.
a) Preparation (picking and packing) and transportation planning must be
completed so that loading can begin on time.5 To check the effects of your delivery and transportation scheduling you now
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 21
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 299/740
5. To check the effects of your delivery and transportation scheduling, you nowcreate an outbound delivery with reference to the last sales order. Use thefollowing information:
Solution 21: Check the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling.
Field Name Value
Shipping point Z0##
Selection date todayOrder order number of the last order
Can the outbound delivery be created?______________________________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Outbound Delivery > Create > Single Document >
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 21
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 300/740
With Reference to Sales Order .
b) Enter the relevant field values on the initial screen of the transaction.
c) Press ENTER to create the outbound delivery.
Solution 21: Check the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling.
d) The outbound delivery cannot be created, since no schedule lines of the orderare due for delivery creation to date.
6. Try to create the outbound delivery again using the material availability date of oneof the items of your order as the selection date. Can you deliver the order now?____________________________________________________________Do NOT save the outbound delivery.
Hint:If you have accidentally saved the outbound delivery, delete the deliverydocument with the transaction:
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 21
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 301/740
document with the transaction:
Logistics > Sales and Distribution > Shipping and Transportation > OutboundDelivery > Change > Single Document. Enter the number of the outbound deliveryin the respective field and choose Outbound Delivery > Delete .
Solution 21: Check the Results of Delivery and TransportationScheduling.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Outbound Delivery > Create > Single Document >With Reference to Sales Order .
b) On the initial screen, enter the shipping point, the order number, and thematerial availability date of one of the order items as the selection date.
c) Press ENTER to create the outbound delivery.
d) Now the outbound delivery can be created. Shipping processing must begin on
the material availability date for the goods to arrive at the customer’s locationon the confirmed delivery date.
TSCM60_1 Unit 4 Solution 21
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 302/740
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Check the results of delivery and transportation scheduling
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 303/740
Unit 5: Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution
Lesson 1: Executing Collective Processing in Sales and Distribution
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 304/740
Lesson 1: Executing Collective Processing in Sales andDistribution
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Explain the idea of worklists
● Create outbound deliveries via collective processing
● Complete shipping functions via collective processing
● Create billing documents via collective processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 305/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 56: Usage of Worklists Unit 5 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 306/740
Procedure: To use Worklists for Collective Processing in Salesand DistributionYou want to create a follow-up document within a sales and distribution process viacollective processing.
1. Start the transaction to create the respective documents (for example, outbound
deliveries) via collective processing.2. Enter the appropriate selection criteria to select the documents (for example, sales
orders), for which you want to create the corresponding follow-up documents (forexample, outbound deliveries).
3. In the results list for your selection, choose the desired documents and create the
follow-up documents directly.4 In some cases (creation of outbound deliveries creation of billing documents) the
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 307/740
4. In some cases (creation of outbound deliveries, creation of billing documents) thesystem provides a log that you can use to retrace the collective run.
TSCM60_1 Figure 57: Collective Processing of the DeliveryDue List
Unit 5 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 308/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 58: Examples for Creation of OutboundDeliveries
Unit 5 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 309/740
Exercise 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.Although you enter orders one at a time, the corresponding follow-up documents areusually created using collective processing. In this way, multiple documents can becreated in one step.You will now create two sales orders and then use collective processing to create thecorresponding outbound deliveries.
Caution:If you have already performed the exercises in the Automatic Data Determination andShipment Scheduling unit, you do not need to create the two orders!
1. Create the first sales order using the following information:
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Exercise 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 310/740
g gField Name Value
Order Type ZA##Sales Organization 1000
Exercise 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.
Field Name ValueDistribution Channel 12
Division 00Sold-to party T-S50B##Purchase order number 6-111Requested delivery date in 10 days
Material Order Quantity
T-AS1## 7T AS2## 8
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Exercise 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 311/740
T-AS2## 8
Save the sales order.
Exercise 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.
2. Create the second sales order using the following information:Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##
Purchase order number 6-411Requested delivery date in 10 days
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Exercise 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 312/740
Material Order quantity Ship-to party
T-AS1## 5 T-S50A##
Exercise 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.
Material Order quantity Ship-to partyT-AS3## 1 T-S50B##
Hint:To maintain the different ship-to party for the second item, branch to the itemdetails and choose the Partners tab page. Overwrite the automaticallydetermined partner for the ship-to party with the ship-to party specified above.
Allow the system to redetermine the plant and the shipping point when thecorresponding dialog box appears. Then save the order.
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Exercise 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 313/740
3. Start the collective processing of documents due for delivery using the followinginformation:
Exercise 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.
Field Name Value
Shipping point Z0##
Delivery creation date From start of this week to today in fourweeksShip-to party T-S50A## and T-S50B##
Hint:
Choose the Multiple selection icon to enter single ship-to party numbers on theselection screen.
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Exercise 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 314/740
4. Why does at least one of the orders that you created appear twice in the list?________________________________________________________________________________________________________
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 315/740
Exercise 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.
_____________ _____________ _____________
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Exercise 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 316/740
Solution 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.Although you enter orders one at a time, the corresponding follow-up documents areusually created using collective processing. In this way, multiple documents can becreated in one step.
You will now create two sales orders and then use collective processing to create thecorresponding outbound deliveries.
Caution:If you have already performed the exercises in the Automatic Data Determination andShipment Scheduling unit, you do not need to create the two orders!
1. Create the first sales order using the following information:
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 317/740
Field Name Value
Order Type ZA##Sales Organization 1000
Solution 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.
Field Name Value
Distribution Channel 12
Division 00Sold-to party T-S50B##Purchase order number 6-111Requested delivery date in 10 days
Material Order Quantity
T-AS1## 7T-AS2## 8
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 318/740
T-AS2## 8
Save the sales order.
Solution 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen.c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Maintain the relevant fields.
e) Choose Sales Document > Save .
2. Create the second sales order using the following information:Field Name Value
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 319/740
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12
Solution 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.
Field Name Value
Division 00
Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 6-411Requested delivery date in 10 days
Material Order quantity Ship-to party
T-AS1## 5 T-S50A##T-AS3## 1 T-S50B##
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 320/740
Solution 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.
Hint:To maintain the different ship-to party for the second item, branch to the item
details and choose the Partners tab page. Overwrite the automaticallydetermined partner for the ship-to party with the ship-to party specified above.
Allow the system to redetermine the plant and the shipping point when thecorresponding dialog box appears. Then save the order.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational data on the initial screen.
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 321/740
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
Solution 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.
d) Maintain the relevant information on the overview screen of the sales order.
e) Double-click item 20 to call the item details.
f) Choose the Partners tab page.
g) In the Partner column, change the ship-to party as requested.
h) Press ENTER to confirm the change of the ship-to party.
i) Confirm the two information messages by pressing ENTER.
j) In the Adjust item dialog box, choose Redetermine to allow the system toredetermine the plant and the shipping point for the item.
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 322/740
k) Choose Sales Document > Save to save the order.
Solution 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.
3. Start the collective processing of documents due for delivery using the followinginformation:
Field Name Value
Shipping point Z0##Delivery creation date From start of this week to today in four
weeksShip-to party T-S50A## and T-S50B##
Hint:Choose the Multiple selection icon to enter single ship-to party numbers on the
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 323/740
selection screen.
Solution 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Outbound Delivery > Create > CollectiveProcessing of Documents Due for Delivery > Sales Orders .
b) Enter the selection criteria given in the exercise.
c) To include two ship-to party numbers, choose Multiple selection in therespective line.
d) Enter the two ship-to party numbers in the Multiple Selection for Ship-to Party
dialog box.e) Choose Copy (F8) to copy the values to the selection screen.
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 324/740
f) Choose Program > Execute to start the selection.
4. Why does at least one of the orders that you created appear twice in the list?
Solution 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) Since this sales order consists of two items with different ship-to parties (androutes), the items in this sales order must be processed further using twooutbound deliveries.
5. Via which routes will the outbound deliveries be shipped?_____________ _____________
a) Take a look at the Route column.b) Routes R 25 and R 3 have been determined.
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 325/740
6. Select only those lines that refer to the two orders you created beforehand, andstart the creation of the corresponding outbound deliveries in the background.
Solution 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.
Hint:Use the CTRL key to select multiple lines.
a) In the list, select the relevant lines.
b) Choose Create Delivery in Background to start collective processing.
7. Display the collective processing log. Note the group (log) number.Group number: ________________________________________
a) Choose Back.
b) Choose Collective Processing Logs .
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 326/740
) g g
c) Choose Program > Execute to display the log.
Solution 22: Create Outbound Deliveries via CollectiveProcessing.
d) The group number is displayed in the first column of the log.
8. How many outbound deliveries have been created?
Number of outbound deliveries: _______________________________a) Check the No. column in the log.
b) 3 outbound deliveries have been created
9. Determine the document numbers of the outbound deliveries._____________ _____________ _____________
a) In the log, choose Documents .
b) Note the document numbers.
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 22
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 327/740
b) Note the document numbers.
TSCM60_1 Figure 59: Picking in Shipping Processing Unit 5 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 328/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 60: Picking Options Unit 5 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 329/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 61: Collective Processing in Picking Unit 5 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 330/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 62: Collective Processing for PostingGoods Issue
Unit 5 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 331/740
Exercise 23: Complete Shipping Functions Using CollectiveProcessing.You want to create multiple transfer orders for picking with reference to thecorresponding outbound deliveries. You also want to post the goods issue for thesedeliveries afterwards.
You decide to execute these process steps using collective processing.
1. Create transfer orders using the outbound delivery monitor. Use the followingcriteria to select the appropriate outbound deliveries:Field Name Value
Shipping point Z0##
Picking date from beginning of this week to today in4 weeks
Route R00025 and R00030
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Exercise 23
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 332/740
Exercise 23: Complete Shipping Functions Using CollectiveProcessing.
2. From the list, select the outbound deliveries that were created during processingof the delivery list.Pick these outbound deliveries in the background (without branching to the
transfer orders).
Hint:Choose Create TO in Background to start the processing.
3. Check the outbound deliveries and determine whether picking has been carried out
successfully.Compare the delivery quantities with the picked quantities in one of your outbounddeliveries. Is there a difference between the quantities?
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Exercise 23
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 333/740
____________________________________________________________
4. Check the overall status of the outbound delivery:
Exercise 23: Complete Shipping Functions Using CollectiveProcessing.
Overall picking status: ___________________________Overall status of WM activities: ___________________________Overall status of goods issue: ___________________________
5. You now want to post the goods issue for the relevant outbound deliveries in asingle step. Start collective processing using the following information:Field Name Value
Shipping point Z0##Planned goods movement date start of this week to today in 4 weeksRoute R00025 and R00030
6 From the list select those outbound deliveries that were created during processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Exercise 23
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 334/740
6. From the list, select those outbound deliveries that were created during processingof the delivery list.Post the goods issue.
Exercise 23: Complete Shipping Functions Using CollectiveProcessing.
7. Check the outbound delivery and determine if the goods issue posting has beencarried out successfully.Check the overall status of the outbound delivery.
Overall status of goods issue: _________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Exercise 23
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 335/740
Solution 23: Complete Shipping Functions Using CollectiveProcessing.You want to create multiple transfer orders for picking with reference to thecorresponding outbound deliveries. You also want to post the goods issue for thesedeliveries afterwards.
You decide to execute these process steps using collective processing.1. Create transfer orders using the outbound delivery monitor. Use the following
criteria to select the appropriate outbound deliveries:
Field Name Value
Shipping point Z0##
Picking date from beginning of this week to today in4 weeks
Route R00025 and R00030
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 23
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 336/740
Solution 23: Complete Shipping Functions Using CollectiveProcessing.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Picking > Create Transfer Order > Via OutboundDelivery Monitor .
b) Enter the selection criteria given in the exercise.
c) Choose Program > Execute .
2. From the list, select the outbound deliveries that were created during processingof the delivery list.Pick these outbound deliveries in the background (without branching to thetransfer orders).
Hint:
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 23
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 337/740
Choose Create TO in Background to start the processing.
Solution 23: Complete Shipping Functions Using CollectiveProcessing.
a) Select the deliveries that were created during processing of the delivery list.
b) Choose Create TO in Background .
c) In the popup window, choose Continue (ENTER).3. Check the outbound deliveries and determine whether picking has been carried out
successfully.Compare the delivery quantities with the picked quantities in one of your outbounddeliveries. Is there a difference between the quantities?
____________________________________________________________a) Double-click one of the outbound deliveries in the list. If you have already left
the transaction, go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose Logistics > Salesd Di t ib ti > Shi i g d T t ti > O tb d D li > Di l
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 23
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 338/740
and Distribution > Shipping and Transportation > Outbound Delivery > Display .
Solution 23: Complete Shipping Functions Using CollectiveProcessing.
b) Enter the number of the desired outbound delivery on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the document details.
d) Choose the Picking tab page.
e) Check that the delivery quantity equals the picked quantity.
4. Check the overall status of the outbound delivery:Overall picking status: ___________________________Overall status of WM activities: ___________________________Overall status of goods issue: ___________________________
a) In the outbound delivery choose Goto > Header > Processing to navigate to the
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 23
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 339/740
a) In the outbound delivery, choose Goto > Header > Processing to navigate to thestatus overview.
Solution 23: Complete Shipping Functions Using CollectiveProcessing.
b) There you can see that the overall picking status is set to C Fully picked , theoverall status of WM activities is set to C WM Transfer order confirmed and theoverall status ofthe goods issue is set to A not yet started .
5. You now want to post the goods issue for the relevant outbound deliveries in asingle step. Start collective processing using the following information:
Field Name Value
Shipping point Z0##Planned goods movement date start of this week to today in 4 weeks
Route R00025 and R00030
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Post Goods Issue > Collective Processing Via
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 23
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 340/740
Shipping and Transportation > Post Goods Issue > Collective Processing ViaOutbound Delivery Monitor .
Solution 23: Complete Shipping Functions Using CollectiveProcessing.
b) Enter the selection criteria given in the exercise.
c) Choose Program > Execute to start the selection.
6. From the list, select those outbound deliveries that were created during processingof the delivery list.Post the goods issue.
a) Select the relevant outbound deliveries.
b) Choose Post Goods Issue .
c) Confirm the proposed actual goods movement date by pressing ENTER whenthe corresponding pop-up appears.
7 Check the outbound delivery and determine if the goods issue posting has been
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 23
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 341/740
7. Check the outbound delivery and determine if the goods issue posting has beencarried out successfully.
Solution 23: Complete Shipping Functions Using CollectiveProcessing.
Check the overall status of the outbound delivery.Overall status of goods issue: _________________________________
a) Double-click one of the outbound deliveries in the list. If you have already leftthe transaction, go to the SAP Easy Access menu and choose Logistics > Salesand Distribution > Shipping and Transportation > Outbound Delivery > Display .
b) Enter the number of the desired outbound delivery on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the document details.
d) Choose Goto > Header > Processing .
e) There you can see that the overall status of the goods issue is C completed .
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 23
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 342/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 63: Processing the Billing Due List Unit 5 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 343/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 64: Billing Options Unit 5 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 344/740
Exercise 24: Create Billing Documents Using CollectiveProcessing.You want to create multiple billing documents with reference to the correspondingoutbound deliveries. To do this, you use collective processing.
1. You want to create billing documents using collective processing. Use the followingcriteria to select the correct outbound deliveries:Field Name Value
Billing date from start of this week to today in fourweeks
Sales organization 1000
Shipping point Z0##Sold-to party T-S50A## and T-S50B##
2 From the list select the outbound deliveries that were created during processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Exercise 24
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 345/740
2. From the list, select the outbound deliveries that were created during processingof the delivery list.
Exercise 24: Create Billing Documents Using CollectiveProcessing.
Test to see what the result of processing the billing due list would be.
Hint:
Choose Simulation .
3. Compare two documents to see why the items from these outbound deliveriescannot be combined in one billing document.
Hint:
Select two documents and choose Split analysis .
4. Return to the Maintain Billing Due List screen and create the billing documentsusing collective processing.
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Exercise 24
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 346/740
g p g
5. Write down the group (log) number of the collective run.
Exercise 24: Create Billing Documents Using CollectiveProcessing.
Group number: _________________________________________
6. Review the log to see how many billing documents have been created.Number: __________________________________________Record the billing document numbers:_____________ _____________ _____________
7. Check one of the created billing documents to see whether the sales process couldbe completed as requested. Use the document flow of the billing document to getthe desired information.Is the sales process completed?____________________________________________________________Why?
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Exercise 24
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 347/740
____________________________________________________________
Exercise 24: Create Billing Documents Using CollectiveProcessing.
____________________________________________________________
8. Review the invoice printout of one of the created billing documents to determinewhether the delivery conditions and payment conditions are correct on the form.Use the message type RD00.
Hint:You must be on the initial screen ( Display Billing Document ) to display theinvoice printout.
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Exercise 24
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 348/740
Solution 24: Create Billing Documents Using CollectiveProcessing.You want to create multiple billing documents with reference to the correspondingoutbound deliveries. To do this, you use collective processing.
1. You want to create billing documents using collective processing. Use the followingcriteria to select the correct outbound deliveries:Field Name Value
Billing date from start of this week to today in fourweeks
Sales organization 1000
Shipping point Z0##Sold-to party T-S50A## and T-S50B##
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 24
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 349/740
Solution 24: Create Billing Documents Using CollectiveProcessing.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Billing > Billing Document > Process Billing Due List .
b) Enter the selection criteria given in the exercise.
c) Choose Billing Document > Display Billing List to start the selection.
2. From the list, select the outbound deliveries that were created during processingof the delivery list.Test to see what the result of processing the billing due list would be.
Hint:Choose Simulation .
a) Select the relevant deliveries
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 24
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 350/740
a) Select the relevant deliveries.
Solution 24: Create Billing Documents Using CollectiveProcessing.
b) Choose Simulation .
3. Compare two documents to see why the items from these outbound deliveriescannot be combined in one billing document.
Hint:Select two documents and choose Split analysis .
a) Select two documents and choose Split analysis .
b) Depending on the documents, different criteria can lead to a billing split; forexample:
● Sold-to party
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 24
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 351/740
Solution 24: Create Billing Documents Using CollectiveProcessing.
● Payer
● Reference document number
●
Assignment number● VAT registration number
4. Return to the Maintain Billing Due List screen and create the billing documentsusing collective processing.
a) Choose Back until you get to the Maintain Billing Due List screen.
b) Select the desired lines.
c) Choose Billing document > Save to create the billing documents. The systemdisplays the log of the collective run immediately
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 24
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 352/740
displays the log of the collective run immediately.
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 353/740
Solution 24: Create Billing Documents Using CollectiveProcessing.
7. Check one of the created billing documents to see whether the sales process couldbe completed as requested. Use the document flow of the billing document to getthe desired information.Is the sales process completed?____________________________________________________________Why?________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) Select a line in the log and choose Environment > Document Flow . If you havealready left the transaction, go to the SAP Easy Access menu and chooseLogistics > Sales and Distribution > Billing > Billing Document > Display , aandthen Environment > Display Document flow .
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 24
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 354/740
Solution 24: Create Billing Documents Using CollectiveProcessing.
b) The sales process is completed because the accounting documents werecreated automatically by the system. Clearing the accounting documents ispart of the process of financial accounting.
8. Review the invoice printout of one of the created billing documents to determinewhether the delivery conditions and payment conditions are correct on the form.Use the message type RD00.
Hint:You must be on the initial screen ( Display Billing Document ) to display the
invoice printout.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Billing > Billing Document > Display .
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 24
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 355/740
Solution 24: Create Billing Documents Using CollectiveProcessing.
b) Choose Billing Document > Issue Output To .
c) If necessary, select message type RD .
d) Choose Print preview .Payment conditions and delivery conditions are printed above the items in theinvoice.
TSCM60_1 Unit 5 Solution 24
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 356/740
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Explain the idea of worklists
● Create outbound deliveries via collective processing
● Complete shipping functions via collective processing
● Create billing documents via collective processing
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 357/740
Unit 6: Availability Check
Lesson 1: Performing an Availability Check - Basics
Lesson 2: Performing an Availability Check - Further Topics
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 358/740
Lesson 1: Performing an Availability Check - Basics
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Check the key factors influencing the availability check
● Identify additional considerations with regard to the availability check
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 359/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 65: Control the Availability Check in SalesOrders
Unit 6 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 360/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 66: Material Availability Check for MaterialAvailability Date
Unit 6 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 361/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 67: Check at Plant Level Unit 6 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 362/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 68: Control of Availability Check Unit 6 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 363/740
Exercise 25: Check the Main Factors Influencing the AvailabilityCheck.You have to investigate the setup of several master data records with regard to executingavailability checks.
1. Check the material master record of material T-AS5##. Will an availability check
be performed for this material and plant 1000 during order entry?_________________________
2. Check which delivering plant is proposed during order entry for sales organization1000 and distribution channel 12 for material number T-AS5##.__________________________
3. Check which delivering plant is maintained as the default value in the masterrecord for customer T-S50B##, sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12,and division 00.___________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Exercise 25
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 364/740
Exercise 25: Check the Main Factors Influencing the AvailabilityCheck.
4. In what sequence is the master data accessed during order processing todetermine the default value for the delivering plant?___________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
5. Can the availability check during order entry be carried out in a different plant tothe one proposed?___________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Exercise 25
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 365/740
Solution 25: Check the Main Factors Influencing the AvailabilityCheck.You have to investigate the setup of several master data records with regard to executingavailability checks.
1. Check the material master record of material T-AS5##. Will an availability check
be performed for this material and plant 1000 during order entry?_________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Master Data > Products > Material > Other > Display .
b) Enter the material number on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to call the view selection.
d) Select the Sales: General/Plant Data view.
e) Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 25
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 366/740
Solution 25: Check the Main Factors Influencing the AvailabilityCheck.
f) In the dialog box, enter plant 1000.
g) Press ENTER to navigate to the selected view.
h) The checking group for availability check 01 is assigned, so an availability checkfor this material takes place during order entry.
2. Check which delivering plant is proposed during order entry for sales organization1000 and distribution channel 12 for material number T-AS5##.__________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Master Data > Products > Material > Other > Display .
b) Enter the material number on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to call the view selection.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 25
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 367/740
Solution 25: Check the Main Factors Influencing the AvailabilityCheck.
d) Select the Sales: Sales Org. Data 1 view.
e) Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
f) In the dialog box, enter sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 12.
g) Press ENTER to navigate to the selected view.
h) Plant 1400 is assigned as the relevant delivering plant.
3. Check which delivering plant is maintained as the default value in the masterrecord for customer T-S50B##, sales organization 1000, distribution channel 12,and division 00.___________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Master Data > Business Partner > Customer > Display > Sales and Distribution .
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 25
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 368/740
Solution 25: Check the Main Factors Influencing the Availability
Check.
b) Enter the customer number and the organizational units on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to call the master record.
d) Choose Goto > Sales Area Data .
e) Choose the Shipping tab page.
f) The default value is plant 1000.
4. In what sequence is the master data accessed during order processing todetermine the default value for the delivering plant?_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 25
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 369/740
Solution 25: Check the Main Factors Influencing the Availability
Check.
a) During order entry, the master data is accessed in the following sequence todetermine the default value for the delivering plant:If different delivering plants have been specified in the master data, theproposal that corresponds to this sequence is transferred for the sales orderitems.
5. Can the availability check during order entry be carried out in a different plant tothe one proposed?___________________________________________________________
a) You have the option of overwriting the proposal manually in the sales order.As part of the availability check, you also have the option of checking in otherplants.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 25
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 370/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 69: Transfer of Requirements Unit 6 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 371/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 70: Complete and Partial Deliveries Unit 6 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 372/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 71: Partial Delivery Agreement Unit 6 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 373/740
Exercise 26: Check the Transfer of Requirements.The material quantities in sales orders are transferred as requirements to the MRPdepartment. This information is essential to trigger the corresponding procurement intime and with the appropriate quantity.
1. You want to gain an overview of the actual stock and requirements situation for a
certain material. Display the current stock and requirements list for material T-AS4##. Write down how many pieces are in stock in plant 1000.___________________________________________________________
2. Create a sales order based on the following information:Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Exercise 26
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 374/740
Exercise 26: Check the Transfer of Requirements.
Field Name ValueSold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 7-621Requested delivery date in 10 days
Material T-AS4##Order quantity 25 pieces
Save the order and write down the order number.________________________
3. You now want to check if the order quantity has been transferred as a requirementto the MRP department correctly. Display the current stock and requirements listfor material T-AS4## and plant 1000 a second time. Which quantity has beentransferred as a requirement?_________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Exercise 26
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 375/740
Exercise 26: Check the Transfer of Requirements.
4. On which date was the requirement transferred? Which date in the sales ordercorresponds to this date?______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Exercise 26
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 376/740
Solution 26: Check the Transfer of Requirements.The material quantities in sales orders are transferred as requirements to the MRPdepartment. This information is essential to trigger the corresponding procurement intime and with the appropriate quantity.
1. You want to gain an overview of the actual stock and requirements situation for a
certain material. Display the current stock and requirements list for material T-AS4##. Write down how many pieces are in stock in plant 1000.___________________________________________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Materials Management >Inventory Management > Environment > Stock > Stock/Requirements List .
b) Enter the material number and the plant on the initial screen of the transaction.c) Press ENTER to call the detail list.
d) The available quantity is displayed in the line with the MRP element Stock in theAvailable Quantity column.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 26
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 377/740
Solution 26: Check the Transfer of Requirements.
2. Create a sales order based on the following information:
Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000
Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 7-621Requested delivery date in 10 days
Material T-AS4##Order quantity 25 pieces
Save the order and write down the order number.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 26
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 378/740
Solution 26: Check the Transfer of Requirements.
________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Maintain the listed data.
e) Choose Sales Document > Save to save the order. The document number isassigned internally by the system.
3. You now want to check if the order quantity has been transferred as a requirementto the MRP department correctly. Display the current stock and requirements listfor material T-AS4## and plant 1000 a second time. Which quantity has beentransferred as a requirement?_________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 26
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 379/740
Solution 26: Check the Transfer of Requirements.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Materials Management >Inventory Management > Environment > Stock > Stock/Requirements List.
b) Enter the material number and the plant on the initial screen of the transaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the detail list.
d) You can see the requirement from the sales order in the line with the MRPelement Order , in the Receipt/Reqmt column.
4. On which date was the requirement transferred? Which date in the sales ordercorresponds to this date?______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) The requirements date (the date in the first column of the stock/requirementslist) corresponds to the material availability date from the sales order item.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 26
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 380/740
Exercise 27: Check the Settings for Complete/Partial Deliveries.In some cases, the system may not be able to confirm the ordered quantities of all itemsfor a requested delivery date during order creation. You could then either split the orderinto partial deliveries or wait until the materials for all items are available for a completedelivery. In the master data, you can maintain which kind of delivery processing thecustomer desires.
1. You want to check in a sales order if partial deliveries are allowed. First, create thesales order using the following information:Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000
Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 7-211
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Exercise 27
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 381/740
Exercise 27: Check the Settings for Complete/Partial Deliveries.
Field Name ValueRequested delivery date in 10 days
Material Order quantity
T-AS1## 10 piecesT-AS2## 10 pieces
2. Determine whether the order could be partially delivered.Which agreement referring to a complete delivery can be seen in the order?__________________________________________________________
3. Which master data is used to propose the Complete Delivery indicator in the orderheader?___________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Exercise 27
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 382/740
Exercise 27: Check the Settings for Complete/Partial Deliveries.
4. Which agreements referring to partial deliveries can be found in item 10 of theorder?___________________________________________________________
5. Which master data is used to propose the Partial delivery / Item field in the orderitem?__________________________________________________________
6. Can you distribute the full amount of a single order item across different deliveriesif the complete delivery field is not selected in the order header?__________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Exercise 27
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 383/740
Solution 27: Check the Settings for Complete/Partial Deliveries
.In some cases, the system may not be able to confirm the ordered quantities of all itemsfor a requested delivery date during order creation. You could then either split the orderinto partial deliveries or wait until the materials for all items are available for a completedelivery. In the master data, you can maintain which kind of delivery processing thecustomer desires.
1. You want to check in a sales order if partial deliveries are allowed. First, create thesales order using the following information:
Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 7-211
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 27
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 384/740
Solution 27: Check the Settings for Complete/Partial Deliveries
.Field Name Value
Requested delivery date in 10 days
Material Order quantity
T-AS1## 10 piecesT-AS2## 10 pieces
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational data on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
2. Determine whether the order could be partially delivered.Which agreement referring to a complete delivery can be seen in the order?
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 27
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 385/740
Solution 27: Check the Settings for Complete/Partial Deliveries
.__________________________________________________________
a) In the sales order, take a look at the Sales tab page.
b) The Complete Delivery field is empty. This means that a complete delivery isnot required and the items could be split up into separate deliveries.
3. Which master data is used to propose the Complete Delivery indicator in the orderheader?___________________________________________________________
a) The complete delivery indicator in the order header is proposed from thecustomer master record.
4. Which agreements referring to partial deliveries can be found in item 10 of theorder?___________________________________________________________
a) In the sales order, double-click item 10.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 27
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 386/740
Solution 27: Check the Settings for Complete/Partial Deliveries
.b) Choose the Shipping tab page.
c) The Partial delivery / Item field is empty. This means that partial deliveries areallowed.
5. Which master data is used to propose the Partial delivery / Item field in the order
item?__________________________________________________________
a) The default value for the field can be maintained in the customer-materialinformation master records and in the customer master record. If an entryexists in the respective customer-material information record, then thisproposal has the higher priority.
6. Can you distribute the full amount of a single order item across different deliveriesif the complete delivery field is not selected in the order header?__________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 27
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 387/740
Solution 27: Check the Settings for Complete/Partial Deliveries
.a) If the complete delivery field is not selected in the order header, the partial
delivery agreement at item level determines whether the amount of the itemcan be split up.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 27
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 388/740
Summary
You should now be able to:● Check the key factors influencing the availability check
● Identify additional considerations with regard to the availability check
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 389/740
Lesson 2: Performing an Availability Check - Further Topics
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Perform availability checks - example scenarios
● Explain the idea of backorder processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 390/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 72: Availability Checks - Scenario 1 Unit 6 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 391/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 73: Availability Checks - Result forScenario 1
Unit 6 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 392/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 74: Availability Checks - Scenario 2 Unit 6 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 393/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 75: Availability Checks - Result forScenario 2
Unit 6 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 394/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 76: Availability Checks - Scenario 3 Unit 6 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 395/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 77: Availability Checks - Result forScenario 3
Unit 6 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 396/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 78: Availability Checks - Scenario 4 Unit 6 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 397/740
Exercise 28: Perform Availability Checks
.You create sales orders for a material with stock shortage and interpret the systembehavior.
1. Create a sales order using the following information:Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50B##
Purchase order number 7-311Requested delivery date in 5 daysMaterial T-AS5##
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Exercise 28
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 398/740
Exercise 28: Perform Availability Checks
.Field Name ValueOrder quantity 10 pieces
2. Since there is insufficient material available for the requested delivery date, thesystem remains on the availability control screen during order entry.
Hint:If you have already left the availability control screen, you can call it again bychoosing Check item availability .
For which plant has the availability check been performed?
_______________________
3. How many pieces can be confirmed for the requested delivery date?_______________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Exercise 28
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 399/740
Exercise 28: Perform Availability Checks
. 4. Which delivery date can be confirmed for the complete quantity?___________________________________________________________
5. You decide to confirm that a complete delivery will be made to the customer at alater date.
6. How many schedule lines have been created for item 10?___________________________________________________________
7. Save the order and write down the order number._______________________
8. Another customer orders the same material. Create the corresponding sales orderusing the following information:Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Exercise 28
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 400/740
Exercise 28: Perform Availability Checks
.Field Name ValueDistribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##
Purchase order number 7-411Requested delivery date in 5 daysMaterial T-AS5##Order quantity 15 pieces
9. Since there is again insufficient material available for the requested delivery date,the system remains on the availability control screen during order entry.You know that the material can also be taken from plant 1400 in Stuttgart. Youtherefore want to see if the material could be made available earlier from there.Check the availability for plant 1400.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Exercise 28
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 401/740
Exercise 28: Perform Availability Checks
.
Hint:To check the availability for another plant, choose Other plants on the availabilitycontrol screen.
10. How many pieces can be confirmed from plant 1400 for the requested deliverydate?___________________________________________________________
11. You decide to deliver the material to the customer from plant 1400. Adopt plant1400 for the item.
12. You want to know if existing purchase orders were taken into account during theavailability check. Examine the scope of the check accordingly.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Exercise 28
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 402/740
Exercise 28: Perform Availability Checks
.
Hint:You can display the scope of the check in the sales order from either theavailability control screen or the availability overview screen. Choose Scope ofcheck on the respective screen.
13. You also want to determine whether the replenishment lead time has been takeninto account during the availability check.
14. Save the order and write down the number.___________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Exercise 28
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 403/740
Solution 28: Perform Availability Checks
.You create sales orders for a material with stock shortage and interpret the systembehavior.
1. Create a sales order using the following information:
Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50B##
Purchase order number 7-311Requested delivery date in 5 daysMaterial T-AS5##
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 28
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 404/740
Solution 28: Perform Availability Checks
. Field Name Value
Order quantity 10 pieces
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to call the sales order details.
d) Maintain the listed data.
2. Since there is insufficient material available for the requested delivery date, thesystem remains on the availability control screen during order entry.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 28
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 405/740
Solution 28: Perform Availability Checks
.
Hint:If you have already left the availability control screen, you can call it again bychoosing Check item availability .
For which plant has the availability check been performed?_______________________
a) You can find the relevant plant for the availability check on the availabilitycontrol screen. It is plant 1000.
3. How many pieces can be confirmed for the requested delivery date?
_______________________a) No quantity can be confirmed for the requested delivery date.
4. Which delivery date can be confirmed for the complete quantity?___________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 28
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 406/740
Solution 28: Perform Availability Checks
. a) You can find the system proposal on the same screen.
5. You decide to confirm that a complete delivery will be made to the customer at alater date.
a) On the availability control screen, choose the Copy pushbutton in the Completedelivery section.
6. How many schedule lines have been created for item 10?___________________________________________________________
a) In the sales order, double-click item 10.
b) Choose the Schedule lines tab page.
c) There are two schedule lines. The first is relevant for the requested deliverydate with a confirmed quantity of 0. The second schedule line contains theconfirmed delivery date.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 28
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 407/740
Solution 28: Perform Availability Checks
. 7. Save the order and write down the order number._______________________
a) In the sales order, choose Sales Document > Save . The document number isassigned internally by the system.
8. Another customer orders the same material. Create the corresponding sales orderusing the following information:
Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000
Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 7-411
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 28
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 408/740
Solution 28: Perform Availability Checks
. Field Name Value
Requested delivery date in 5 daysMaterial T-AS5##Order quantity 15 pieces
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.d) Maintain the listed data.
9. Since there is again insufficient material available for the requested delivery date,the system remains on the availability control screen during order entry.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 28
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 409/740
Solution 28: Perform Availability Checks
. You know that the material can also be taken from plant 1400 in Stuttgart. Youtherefore want to see if the material could be made available earlier from there.Check the availability for plant 1400.
Hint:To check the availability for another plant, choose Other plants on the availabilitycontrol screen.
a) On the availability control screen, choose Other plants .
b) In the Plant Selection dialog box, set a checkmark next to plant 1400.
c) Choose Check Plant .10. How many pieces can be confirmed from plant 1400 for the requested delivery
date?___________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 28
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 410/740
Solution 28: Perform Availability Checks
. a) 15 pieces
11. You decide to deliver the material to the customer from plant 1400. Adopt plant1400 for the item.
a) On the screen with the result of the availability check for plant 1400, select theline for plant 1400.
b) Choose Goto > Adopt Plant to use plant 1400 for your item.
12. You want to know if existing purchase orders were taken into account during theavailability check. Examine the scope of the check accordingly.
Hint:You can display the scope of the check in the sales order from either theavailability control screen or the availability overview screen. Choose Scope ofcheck on the respective screen.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 28
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 411/740
Solution 28: Perform Availability Checks
. a) In the sales order, choose Display Availability .
b) On the Availability Overview screen, choose Scope of Check .
c) In this case, purchase orders are also checked alongside other inward andoutward movements.
13. You also want to determine whether the replenishment lead time has been takeninto account during the availability check.
a) When you display the scope of the check, the Check without RLT field is notselected. This means that in this case the replenishment lead time has beentaken into account.
14. Save the order and write down the number.___________________________________________________________
a) Choose Sales Document > Save to save the sales order. The document numberis assigned internally by the system.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 28
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 412/740
Exercise 29: Understand the Functions of the Availability Check
. 1. Why can the result of an availability check in the sales order be dependent on apartial delivery agreement?______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Why is the completion of delivery scheduling a prerequisite for the availabilitycheck in the sales order?___________________________________________________________
3. Why is delivery scheduling carried out after the availability check if the item cannotbe confirmed for the required delivery date?___________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Exercise 29
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 413/740
Solution 29: Understand the Functions of the Availability Check
. 1. Why can the result of an availability check in the sales order be dependent on apartial delivery agreement?______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) If only part of the required quantity is available on the requested delivery dateand the customer agrees to a partial delivery, then a delivery split can becarried out and a partial quantity can be confirmed for the required deliverydate.If the customer does not allow partial delivery, the complete amount can onlybe confirmed for a later date.
2. Why is the completion of delivery scheduling a prerequisite for the availabilitycheck in the sales order?___________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 29
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 414/740
Solution 29: Understand the Functions of the Availability Check.
a) The availability check takes place on the material availability date. Thematerials are required on this date, so that enough time remains for packing,loading,and transportation before the required delivery date. This means thematerial availability date must be determined in the sales order before theavailability check is carried out.
3. Why is delivery scheduling carried out after the availability check if the item cannotbe confirmed for the required delivery date?___________________________________________________________
a) If the item cannot not be confirmed for the required delivery date, the systemcarries out delivery scheduling from the earliest possible material availabilitydate (forward scheduling) to determine a confirmable delivery date.
TSCM60_1 Unit 6 Solution 29
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 415/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 79: Backorder Processing Unit 6 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 416/740
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Perform availability checks - example scenarios
● Explain the idea of backorder processing
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 417/740
Unit 7: Sales Documents - Basic Technical Background
Lesson 1: Using Sales Document Types
Lesson 2: Using Item Categories
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 418/740
Lesson 1: Using Sales Document Types
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Create sales orders using different sales document types
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 419/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 80: Sales Document Types Unit 7 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 420/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 81: Functions of Sales Documents Unit 7 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 421/740
Exercise 30: Create Sales Orders Using Different SalesDocument Types.You can use specific sales document types to fulfill certain requirements during the salesand distribution process. Using the appropriate sales document type, you can ensure thatthe material is sent to the customer free of charge, for example. You now want to test twoof these specific sales document types.
1. Create a rush order to start delivery processing immediately using the followinginformation:Field Name Value
Order Type ROSales Organization 1000
Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 23-111
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Exercise 30
TSCM60 1 U i 7 E i 30
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 422/740
Exercise 30: Create Sales Orders Using Different SalesDocument Types.
Field Name ValueMaterial T-AS1##Order quantity 5
2. Save the sales order and make a note of the order number.__________________________________
3. The outbound delivery for your sales order has automatically been created. Make anote of the document number.__________________________________
4. Check the document flow of the sales order. Which further document has beencreated automatically?__________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Exercise 30
TSCM60 1 U i 7 E i 30
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 423/740
Exercise 30: Create Sales Orders Using Different SalesDocument Types.
5. Create a sales order to ensure a delivery free of charge using the followinginformation:Field Name Value
Order Type FD
Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 23-112
Order reason Free of charge sampleMaterial T-AS1##Order quantity 5
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Exercise 30
TSCM60 1 U it 7 E i 30
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 424/740
Exercise 30: Create Sales Orders Using Different SalesDocument Types.
6. What is the net value of the sales order item?
7. Save the sales order and make a note of the order number.__________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Exercise 30
TSCM60 1 Unit 7 Solution 30
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 425/740
Solution 30: Create Sales Orders Using Different SalesDocument Types.You can use specific sales document types to fulfill certain requirements during the salesand distribution process. Using the appropriate sales document type, you can ensure thatthe material is sent to the customer free of charge, for example. You now want to test twoof these specific sales document types.
1. Create a rush order to start delivery processing immediately using the followinginformation:
Field Name Value
Order Type ROSales Organization 1000
Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Solution 30
TSCM60 1 Unit 7 Solution 30
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 426/740
Solution 30: Create Sales Orders Using Different SalesDocument Types.
Field Name Value
Purchase order number 23-111Material T-AS1##Order quantity 5
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Maintain the relevant information on the overview screen.
2. Save the sales order and make a note of the order number.
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Solution 30
TSCM60 1 Unit 7 Solution 30
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 427/740
Solution 30: Create Sales Orders Using Different SalesDocument Types.
__________________________________
a) In the sales order, choose Sales Document > Save .
3. The outbound delivery for your sales order has automatically been created. Make anote of the document number.__________________________________
a) The number of the outbound delivery is displayed at the bottom of the screenafter you have saved the sales order.
4. Check the document flow of the sales order. Which further document has beencreated automatically?__________________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Display .
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Solution 30
TSCM60 1 Unit 7 Solution 30
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 428/740
Solution 30: Create Sales Orders Using Different SalesDocument Types.
b) Enter the order number on the initial screen of the transaction.
c) Choose Environment > Display document flow .
d) You can see that the transfer order for picking has also been createdautomatically. However, this has not been triggered by the sales documenttype directly, but by a particular setting in Customizing for Logistics Execution.
5. Create a sales order to ensure a delivery free of charge using the followinginformation:
Field Name Value
Order Type FDSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Solution 30
TSCM60 1 Unit 7 Solution 30
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 429/740
Solution 30: Create Sales Orders Using Different SalesDocument Types.
Field Name Value
Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 23-112Order reason Free of charge sampleMaterial T-AS1##Order quantity 5
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Solution 30
TSCM60 1 Unit 7 Solution 30
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 430/740
Solution 30: Create Sales Orders Using Different SalesDocument Types.
d) Maintain the relevant information on the overview screen.
6. What is the net value of the sales order item?
a) In the sales order, double-click item 10.
b) Choose the Conditions tab page.c) As you can see, no sales price has been determined by the system and the net
value of the item is 0.
7. Save the sales order and make a note of the order number.__________________________________
a) In the sales order, choose Sales Document > Save .
_
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 431/740
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Create sales orders using different sales document types
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 432/740
Lesson 2: Using Item Categories
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Explain the concept of item categories
● Explain item category determination
TSCM60_1 Figure 82: Item Categories - Functions Unit 7 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 433/740
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Exercise 31
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 434/740
Exercise 31: Check the Consequences of Using Different ItemCategories.You want to test how different item categories can affect a sales order and create acorresponding document.
1. Create a sales order using the following information:Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 27-1115
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Exercise 31
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 435/740
Exercise 31: Check the Consequences of Using Different ItemCategories.
Material Order Quantity
T-AS1## 5T-AS2## 1
2. Which item categories have been determined by the system?Item Item Category
10
20
3. Change the item category of the second item to TANN.4. Check the result of the new pricing for item 20. What has changed?
________________________________________________________________________
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 436/740
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Solution 31
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 437/740
Solution 31: Check the Consequences of Using Different ItemCategories.
Material Order Quantity
T-AS1## 5T-AS2## 1
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Maintain the relevant information on the overview screen.
e) Press ENTER to allow the system to determine the item categories.
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Solution 31
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 438/740
Solution 31: Check the Consequences of Using Different ItemCategories.
2. Which item categories have been determined by the system?
Item Item Category
10
20
a) You can find the item categories on the overview screen in the item lines. Thesystem has determined the item category TAN for both items.
3. Change the item category of the second item to TANN.
a) On the overview screen, change the field value in the corresponding column.
b) Press ENTER to confirm the change.
c) When the popup for executing new pricing appears, press ENTER to continue.
TSCM60_1 Unit 7 Solution 31
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 439/740
Solution 31: Check the Consequences of Using Different ItemCategories.
4. Check the result of the new pricing for item 20. What has changed?________________________________________________________________________
a) In the sales order, double-click item 20.
b) Choose the Conditions tab page.
c) Triggered by the change to the item category, the system has determined aspecial discount of 100% using the condition type R100. This reduces the netvalue of the item to 0.
TSCM60_1 Figure 83: Item Category Determination -Example 1
Unit 7 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 440/740
Example 1
TSCM60_1 Figure 84: Item Category Determination -Example 2
Unit 7 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 441/740
Example 2
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 442/740
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Explain the concept of item categories
● Explain item category determination
Unit 8: Special Processes in Sales and Distribution
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 443/740
p
Lesson 1: Using Presales Documents
Lesson 2: Executing Assembly Processing
Lesson 3: Packing Materials
Lesson 4: Selling Service Products
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 444/740
Lesson 1: Using Presales Documents
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Create presales documents
TSCM60_1 Figure 85: Sales Support Tasks Unit 8 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 445/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 86: Presales Documents Unit 8 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 446/740
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 447/740
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 32
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 448/740
Exercise 32: Create Presales Documents.
You receive a customer inquiry and create the corresponding document in the system.Based on that inquiry, you create a quotation later on. To complete the process, youcreate a sales order with reference to the quotation.
1. Create an inquiry based on the following information:Field Name Value
Inquiry Type INSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##
Material T-AS3##Quantity 3 pieces
You want the inquiry to be processed by the end of the month.
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 32
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 449/740
Exercise 32: Create Presales Documents.
Hint:When creating the inquiry, you can use the Valid to field to maintain a processingdeadline.
2. Save the inquiry and write down the number.
___________________________________
3. Since there is currently a lot of demand for the requested material, you only wantto offer the customer 2 pieces. The quotation should be valid from today until theend of next month . Create the quotation with reference to the inquiry using thefollowing information:
Field Name ValueQuotation Type QTSales Organization 1000
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 32
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 450/740
Exercise 32: Create Presales Documents.
Field Name ValueDistribution Channel 12Division 00
4. Save the quotation and write down the number.
___________________________________5. The customer now orders the offered material as a result of the quotation. Create
the corresponding sales order with reference to the quotation using the followinginformation:Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 32
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 451/740
Exercise 32: Create Presales Documents.
Field Name ValueDivision 00Purchase order number 8-131Requested delivery date in 10 daysMaterial T-AS3##
Order Quantity 1 piece
6. Save the sales order and write down the document number.___________________________________
7. Display the reference status for the item in the inquiry.
__________________________________________________
8. Display the reference status for the item in the quotation.__________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 32
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 452/740
Solution 32: Create Presales Documents.
You receive a customer inquiry and create the corresponding document in the system.Based on that inquiry, you create a quotation later on. To complete the process, youcreate a sales order with reference to the quotation.
1. Create an inquiry based on the following information:
Field Name Value
Inquiry Type INSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##
Material T-AS3##Quantity 3 pieces
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 32
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 453/740
Solution 32: Create Presales Documents.
You want the inquiry to be processed by the end of the month.
Hint:When creating the inquiry, you can use the Valid to field to maintain a processingdeadline.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Inquiry > Create.
b) Enter the inquiry type and the organizational units on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to call the document details.
d) Enter the data given in the exercise. Do not forget to enter the Valid to date.2. Save the inquiry and write down the number.
___________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 32
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 454/740
Solution 32: Create Presales Documents.
a) In the inquiry, choose Sales document > Save .3. Since there is currently a lot of demand for the requested material, you only want
to offer the customer 2 pieces. The quotation should be valid from today until theend of next month . Create the quotation with reference to the inquiry using thefollowing information:
Field Name ValueQuotation Type QTSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Quotation > Create.
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 32
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 455/740
Solution 32: Create Presales Documents.
b) Enter the quotation type and the organizational units on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Choose Create with Reference .
d) Enter your inquiry number or use the search help to retrieve it.
e) Choose Item Selection .f) Change the quantity to 2 pieces.
g) Choose Copy .
h) Enter Valid from and Valid to dates as given in the exercise.
4. Save the quotation and write down the number.___________________________________
a) In the quotation, choose Sales document > Save .
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 32
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 456/740
Solution 32: Create Presales Documents.
5. The customer now orders the offered material as a result of the quotation. Createthe corresponding sales order with reference to the quotation using the followinginformation:
Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Purchase order number 8-131Requested delivery date in 10 days
Material T-AS3##Order Quantity 1 piece
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 32
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 457/740
Solution 32: Create Presales Documents.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Orders > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Choose Create with Reference .
d) Enter your quotation number or use the search help to retrieve it.
e) Enter the requested delivery date.
f) Choose Item Selection .
g) Change the quantity to 1 piece.
h) Choose Copy .
i) Enter the purchase order number.
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 32
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 458/740
Solution 32: Create Presales Documents.
6. Save the sales order and write down the document number.___________________________________
a) In the sales order, choose Sales document > Save .
7. Display the reference status for the item in the inquiry.__________________________________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Inquiry > Display.
b) Enter your inquiry number on the initial screen.
c) Choose Environment > Status overview.
d) Expand item 10.
e) The reference status for the inquiry states that it is fully referenced, althoughonly 2 of the 3 units have been copied from the inquiry amount to the
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 32
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 459/740
Solution 32: Create Presales Documents.
quotation. When using the standard system settings, an inquiry item is markedas fully referenced as soon as at least a partial quantity of the item has beencopied to a quotation.
8. Display the reference status for the item in the quotation.__________________________________________________
a) Choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution > Sales > Quotation > Display.b) Enter your quotation number on the initial screen.
c) Choose Environment > Status overview.
d) Expand item 10.
e) The reference status for the quotation states that it is partially referenced,since only 1 of the 2 units has been copied from the quotation to the salesorder. When using the standard system settings, a quotation item is marked asfully referenced only when the full quantity has been copied.
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 33
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 460/740
Exercise 33: Understand the Processing of Presales Documents.
Questions about presales documents.1. Name some of the differences between an inquiry and a quotation.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Does an inquiry have to be set up before a quotation can be created?____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3. Does automatic pricing take place during entry of quotations or inquiries?____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 33
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 461/740
Exercise 33: Understand the Processing of Presales Documents.
4. Do you have the option of carrying out the availability check in an inquiry or aquotation as you do in the sales order?____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 33
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 462/740
Solution 33: Understand the Processing of Presales Documents.
Questions about presales documents.1. Name some of the differences between an inquiry and a quotation.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) Inquiries are customer requests for the sales and distribution conditions of amaterial (price, delivery date, and so on). You provide your customer with therelevant information using quotations.For inquiries, the validity date is used in the system as a processing deadlinefor an answer to the inquiry. Quotations are legally binding during the customervalidity period.
2. Does an inquiry have to be set up before a quotation can be created?____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 33
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 463/740
Solution 33: Understand the Processing of Presales Documents.
a) No. Quotations without reference to an inquiry can also be created.3. Does automatic pricing take place during entry of quotations or inquiries?
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) Yes. Automatic pricing takes place (dependent on Customizing) during inquiry
and quotation creation.
4. Do you have the option of carrying out the availability check in an inquiry or aquotation as you do in the sales order?____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
a) Yes. An availability check is carried out during inquiry and quotation entry inthe same way as during sales order entry (dependent on Customizing).
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 464/740
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Create presales documents
L 2 E i A bl P i
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 465/740
Lesson 2: Executing Assembly Processing
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Execute the assembly order process
● Explain assembly processing with variant configuration
TSCM60_1 Figure 88: Make-To-Order Flow Unit 8 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 466/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 89: Make-To-Order Production withoutAssembly Processing
Unit 8 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 467/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 90: Make-To-Order Production withAssembly Processing
Unit 8 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 468/740
Exercise 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 469/740
Exercise 34: Execute Assembly Processing.
A customer orders a specially lacquered petrol tank from you in accordance with his ownrequirements.
1. A customer orders a petrol tank for his motorbike. The product has to beassembled before it can be shipped. The necessary master data for production (billof material, routing) has already been created. Create a sales order based on thefollowing information:
Field Name ValueOrder Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 8-311Requested delivery date in 10 days
Exercise 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 470/740
Exercise 34: Execute Assembly Processing.
Field Name ValueMaterial T-FS1##Order Quantity 1
2. Save the sales order and write down the number.________________________________________
3. Display the sales order that you created in the previous task.Check the procurement data for petrol tank T-FS1## on the schedule line for item10, and write down the number of the assembly order.______________________________________
4. Display the assembly order header. Note the basic dates for the start and finish ofthe assembly order.______________________________________
Exercise 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 471/740
Exercise 34: Execute Assembly Processing.
______________________________________5. Which date in the sales order corresponds to the basic end date in the assembly
order?
6. The customer informs you that he would like to have petrol tank T-FS1## delivered8 days later. Change the requested delivery date for item 10 accordingly in the
sales order.7. Display the assembly order from the sales order. Write down how the end date has
changed._______________________________________________________
8. Save the sales order.
9. Production informs you that the petrol tank has been assembled. In materialsmanagement, enter the goods receipt for the assembly order using the followinginformation:
Exercise 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 472/740
Exercise 34: Execute Assembly Processing.
Field Name ValueMovement Type 101Order Number of the production orderPlant 1000Storage Location 0001
Hint:To enter the goods receipt in materials management, choose Logistics >Materials Management > Inventory Management > Goods Movement > GoodsReceipt > For Order .
10. Display the stock overview for material T-FS1## in plant 1000.
Exercise 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 473/740
Exercise 34: Execute Assembly Processing.
Hint:To display the stock overview in materials management, choose Logistics >Materials Management > Inventory Management > Environment > Stock > StockOverview .
How many pieces are kept in the sales order stock?__________________________
11. Create the outbound delivery with reference to the sales order using the followinginformation:Field Name Value
Shipping Point Z0##Selection Date in 20 daysOrder Number of the sales order
Exercise 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 474/740
Exercise 34: Execute Assembly Processing.
12. Save the outbound delivery and write down the document number._______________________________________________
13. Pick the outbound delivery using the following information:Field Name Value
Warehouse Number 010
Delivery Number of the outbound deliveryForeground/Background Background
14. Post the goods issue for the outbound delivery.
15. To conclude, display the stock overview for material T-FS1## a second time. How
many pieces are now kept in the sales order stock in plant 1000?___________________________
Solution 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 475/740
Solution 34: Execute Assembly Processing.
A customer orders a specially lacquered petrol tank from you in accordance with his ownrequirements.
1. A customer orders a petrol tank for his motorbike. The product has to beassembled before it can be shipped. The necessary master data for production (billof material, routing) has already been created. Create a sales order based on thefollowing information:
Field Name ValueOrder Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 8-311
Solution 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 476/740
Solution 34: Execute Assembly Processing.
Field Name ValueRequested delivery date in 10 daysMaterial T-FS1##Order Quantity 1
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational data on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Maintain the relevant information on the overview screen.
2. Save the sales order and write down the number.________________________________________
Solution 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 477/740
y g.
a) In the sales order, choose Sales document > Save . The document number isassigned internally by the system.
3. Display the sales order that you created in the previous task.Check the procurement data for petrol tank T-FS1## on the schedule line for item10, and write down the number of the assembly order.______________________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Display .
b) Enter the order number on the initial screen of the transaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Double-click item 10.
e) Choose the Schedule lines tab page.
Solution 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 478/740
y g.
f) Choose Procurement .
g) The document number for the assembly order can be found on the tab page.
4. Display the assembly order header. Note the basic dates for the start and finish ofthe assembly order.______________________________________
______________________________________a) On the Procurement tab page, choose Header .
The relevant dates are displayed on the General tab page.
5. Which date in the sales order corresponds to the basic end date in the assemblyorder?
a) The material availability date of the schedule line corresponds to the basic enddate of the production order.
Solution 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 479/740
y g.
6. The customer informs you that he would like to have petrol tank T-FS1## delivered8 days later. Change the requested delivery date for item 10 accordingly in thesales order.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Change .
b) Enter the number of the sales order on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Change the date in the First date column accordingly.
e) Press ENTER to confirm the change.
7. Display the assembly order from the sales order. Write down how the end date haschanged._______________________________________________________
Solution 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 480/740
.a) In the sales order, double-click item 10.
b) Choose the Schedule lines tab page.
c) Choose Production order . Since the required delivery date was changed in theprevious exercise, a new material availability date was determined in the salesorder. This new date was then transferred to the assembly order as a new basic
end date.8. Save the sales order.
a) In the sales order, choose Sales document > Save .
9. Production informs you that the petrol tank has been assembled. In materialsmanagement, enter the goods receipt for the assembly order using the followinginformation:Field Name Value
Movement Type 101
Solution 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 481/740
.
Field Name ValueOrder Number of the production orderPlant 1000Storage Location 0001
Hint:To enter the goods receipt in materials management, choose Logistics >Materials Management > Inventory Management > Goods Movement > GoodsReceipt > For Order .
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Materials Management >Inventory Management > Goods Movement > Goods Receipt > For Order .
b) Enter the specified field values on the initial screen of the transaction.
Solution 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 482/740
.c) Press ENTER to call the details of the goods receipt.
d) Choose Goods Receipt > Post .
10. Display the stock overview for material T-FS1## in plant 1000.
Hint:
To display the stock overview in materials management, choose Logistics >Materials Management > Inventory Management > Environment > Stock > StockOverview .
How many pieces are kept in the sales order stock?__________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Materials Management >Inventory Management > Environment > Stock > Stock Overview .
Solution 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 483/740
.b) Enter the material number and the plant on the initial screen of the transaction.
c) Choose Program > Execute .
d) 1 piece of the material is kept in the sales order stock.
11. Create the outbound delivery with reference to the sales order using the followinginformation:
Field Name Value
Shipping Point Z0##Selection Date in 20 daysOrder Number of the sales order
Solution 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 484/740
.a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Shipping and Transportation > Outbound Delivery > Create > Single Document >With Reference to Sales Order .
b) Press ENTER to call the document details.
12. Save the outbound delivery and write down the document number.
_______________________________________________a) Choose Outbound Delivery > Save .
13. Pick the outbound delivery using the following information:
Field Name Value
Warehouse Number 010Delivery Number of the outbound deliveryForeground/Background Background
Solution 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 485/740
.a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Shipping and Transportation > Picking > Create Transfer Order > SingleDocument .
b) Enter the relevant information on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to create the transfer order for picking.
14. Post the goods issue for the outbound delivery.a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Shipping and Transportation > Post Goods Issue > Outbound Delivery SingleDocument .
b) Enter the number of the outbound delivery on the initial screen.
c) Choose Edit > Post Goods Issue .
Solution 34: Execute Assembly Processing
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 34
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 486/740
.15. To conclude, display the stock overview for material T-FS1## a second time. How
many pieces are now kept in the sales order stock in plant 1000?___________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Materials Management >Inventory Management > Environment > Stock > Stock Overview .
b) Enter the material number and the plant on the initial screen.
c) Choose Program > Execute . There is no more sales order stock.
TSCM60_1 Figure 91: Assembly Processing with VariantConfiguration - Example
Unit 8 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 487/740
Summary
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 488/740
You should now be able to:
● Execute the assembly order process● Explain assembly processing with variant configuration
Lesson 3: Packing Materials
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Lesson 3
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 489/740
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Pack material
TSCM60_1 Figure 92: Packing on Multiple Levels Unit 8 Lesson 3
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 490/740
Exercise 35: Pack a Material
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 35
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 491/740
.You receive an order from your customer and want to pack the material before it is sent.
1. Create a sales order using the following information:Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000
Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 8-4455Requested delivery date in 10 days
Material T-AS2##Order Quantity 10 pieces
Exercise 35: Pack a Material
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 35
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 492/740
.2. Save the sales order and write down the order number.
__________________________________
3. Create the outbound delivery with reference to the sales order using the followinginformation:Field Name Value
Shipping Point Z0##Selection Date in 10 daysOrder The order number
4. Pack the material into boxes (packaging material PK-100), five pieces per box.
5. Pack the boxes onto a pallet (packaging material PK-095).6. Display the overview of all the created handling units. To which hierarchy level are
the boxes (PK-100) assigned?
Exercise 35: Pack a Material
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 35
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 493/740
.____________________________
7. Navigate back to the main screen of the outbound delivery. How many items doesthe document contain?____________________________
8. Save the outbound delivery and write down the document number.
____________________________
Solution 35: Pack a Material
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 35
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 494/740
.You receive an order from your customer and want to pack the material before it is sent.
1. Create a sales order using the following information:
Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000
Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 8-4455Requested delivery date in 10 days
Material T-AS2##Order Quantity 10 pieces
Solution 35: Pack a Material
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 35
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 495/740
.a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational data on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Maintain the relevant information.
2. Save the sales order and write down the order number.__________________________________
a) In the sales order, choose Sales document > Save .
3. Create the outbound delivery with reference to the sales order using the followinginformation:
Solution 35: Pack a Material
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 35
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 496/740
.Field Name Value
Shipping Point Z0##Selection Date in 10 daysOrder The order number
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Outbound Delivery > Create > Single Document >With Reference to Sales Order .
b) Enter the relevant information on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to call the details of the document.
4. Pack the material into boxes (packaging material PK-100), five pieces per box.a) In the outbound delivery, choose Edit > Pack .
Solution 35: Pack a Material
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 35
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 497/740
.b) Enter PK-100 as the packaging material in the corresponding column (upper
part of the screen).
c) Press ENTER to confirm the entry.
d) For the material to be packed, change the Partial Quantity to 5 pieces.
e) Press ENTER to adopt the change.
f) Select the line with the packaging material and the line with the material to bepacked.
g) Choose Edit > Pack > New HU for Partial Quantity of Material . The systemautomatically packs the 10 pieces into 2 boxes and creates a correspondingsecond handling unit.
5. Pack the boxes onto a pallet (packaging material PK-095).
a) On the packing screen, choose the Pack HUs tab page.
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 498/740
Solution 35: Pack a Material.
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 35
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 499/740
.a) Choose Goto > Back to navigate to the main screen of the outbound delivery.
b) The system has created two additional items for the packaging materials. Nowthere are three items in the document.
8. Save the outbound delivery and write down the document number.____________________________
a) Choose Outbound Delivery > Save .
SummaryYou should now be able to:
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 500/740
●
Pack material
Lesson 4: Selling Service Products
b
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Lesson 4
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 501/740
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Sell service products
TSCM60_1 Figure 93: Service Products Unit 8 Lesson 4
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 502/740
Exercise 36: Sell a Service Product.
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 36
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 503/740
Sales orders can also be used to sell services. To test this kind of process, you first have alook at a service product and then use it in the sales process.
1. Display the material master data of the service product T-AS-REPAIR using thefollowing information:Field Name Value
Plant 1000Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12
Note:Select the Basic Data 1 , Sales: Sales Org. Data 1 + 2 , and Sales: General/PlantData views.
2. Which material type has been used for the material?
Exercise 36: Sell a Service Product.
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 36
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 504/740
_____________________________
3. Which item category has been assigned to the service product?_____________________________
4. To sell the service product, create a sales order using the following information:Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##
Purchase order number 8-657Material T-AS-REPAIR
Exercise 36: Sell a Service Product.
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Exercise 36
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 505/740
Field Name ValueOrder Quantity 1 LE
5. Which item category has been determined for the item?_____________________________
6. Save the sales order and make a note of the document number._____________________________
7. To complete the process, create the invoice with reference to the sales order.Make a note of the document number._____________________________
Solution 36: Sell a Service Product.
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 36
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 506/740
Sales orders can also be used to sell services. To test this kind of process, you first have alook at a service product and then use it in the sales process.
1. Display the material master data of the service product T-AS-REPAIR using thefollowing information:
Field Name Value
Plant 1000Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12
Note:Select the Basic Data 1 , Sales: Sales Org. Data 1 + 2 , and Sales: General/PlantData views.
Solution 36: Sell a Service Product.
) F h SAP E A h L i i S l d Di ib i
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 36
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 507/740
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Master Data > Products > Material > Services > Display .
b) Enter the material number on the initial screen of the transaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the view selection.
d) Select the relevant views.
e) Choose Continue to confirm your selection.
f) Maintain the relevant organizational units.
g) Choose Continue to call the master record.
2. Which material type has been used for the material?_____________________________
a) On the Basic Data 1 tab page, choose Information on material .
Solution 36: Sell a Service Product.
b) I th i d th t th di t i l t i
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 36
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 508/740
b) In the pop-up window, you can see that the corresponding material type is
DIEN.
3. Which item category has been assigned to the service product?_____________________________
a) Choose the Sales: sales org. 2 tab page. The item category LEIS has beenassigned to the material.
4. To sell the service product, create a sales order using the following information:
Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000
Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##
Solution 36: Sell a Service Product.
i ld l
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 36
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 509/740
Field Name Value
Purchase order number 8-657Material T-AS-REPAIROrder Quantity 1 LE
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Sales > Order > Create .b) Enter the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen of the
transaction.
c) Maintain the relevant information.
5. Which item category has been determined for the item?_____________________________
Solution 36: Sell a Service Product.
a) Double click the item to call the item details
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 36
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 510/740
a) Double-click the item to call the item details.
b) On the top of the screen, you can see that the item category TAD has beendetermined by the system.
6. Save the sales order and make a note of the document number._____________________________
a) In the sales order, choose Sales document > Save .7. To complete the process, create the invoice with reference to the sales order.
Make a note of the document number._____________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Billing > Billing Document > Create .b) Enter the number of the sales order in the Document column.
Solution 36: Sell a Service Product.
c) Choose Billing document > Save to save the invoice
TSCM60_1 Unit 8 Solution 36
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 511/740
c) Choose Billing document > Save to save the invoice.
SummaryYou should now be able to:
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 512/740
● Sell service products
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 513/740
Lesson 1: Creating Credit Memo Requests
Lesson Objectives
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 514/740
jAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Create a credit memo request
TSCM60_1 Figure 94: Processes in Complaints Processing Unit 9 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 515/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 95: Processing Credit and Debit Memos Unit 9 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 516/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 96: Approving a Credit Memo Unit 9 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 517/740
Exercise 37: Create a Credit Memo Request.You sell headlights to a customer. After the headlights have been delivered to the
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Exercise 37
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 518/740
customer and he has paid, the customer complains that one of the headlights does notwork. You agree with the customer that he will be given credit for the amount he hasalready paid.
1. Create a sales order using the following information:Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##
Purchase order number 9-111Requested delivery date in 10 days
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 519/740
Exercise 37: Create a Credit Memo Request.
4. Save the outbound delivery and record the document number.
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Exercise 37
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 520/740
________________________________
5. Pick the delivery and post the goods issue. To do so, create a transfer order usingthe following information:Field Name Value
Warehouse Number 010
Delivery Number of your outbound deliveryForeground/Background BackgroundAdopt Pick Quantity 2 (include pick quantities in delivery
and post GI)
6. Create the billing document with reference to the outbound delivery. Make a noteof the document number.___________________________________
Exercise 37: Create a Credit Memo Request.
7. The customer complains that 1 headlight does not work. Create a corresponding
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Exercise 37
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 521/740
credit memo request with reference to the sales order based on the followinginformation:Field Name Value
Order Type CRSales Organization 1000
Distribution Channel 12Division 00
8. Maintain Damaged in transit as the order reason.
9. Save the credit memo request and record the document number.
___________________________________10. Release the credit memo request for billing by removing the billing block.
Exercise 37: Create a Credit Memo Request.
11. Create the credit memo for the credit memo request and make a note of the
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Exercise 37
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 522/740
document number.___________________________________
Solution 37: Create a Credit Memo Request.You sell headlights to a customer. After the headlights have been delivered to the
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 37
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 523/740
customer and he has paid, the customer complains that one of the headlights does notwork. You agree with the customer that he will be given credit for the amount he hasalready paid.
1. Create a sales order using the following information:
Field Name Value
Order Type ORSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##
Purchase order number 9-111Requested delivery date in 10 days
Solution 37: Create a Credit Memo Request.
Field Name Value
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 37
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 524/740
Material T-AS1##Order quantity 5 pieces
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Maintain the relevant information.
2. Save the order and write down the document number.________________________________
Solution 37: Create a Credit Memo Request.
a) In the sales order, choose Sales document > Save . The document number is
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 37
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 525/740
assigned internally by the system.3. Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order using the following
information:
Field Name Value
Shipping point Z0##
Selection date in 20 daysOrder Your order number
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Outbound Delivery > Create > Single Document >With Reference to Sales Order .
b) Enter the relevant information on the initial screen of the transaction.
Solution 37: Create a Credit Memo Request.
c) Press ENTER to call the document details.
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 37
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 526/740
4. Save the outbound delivery and record the document number.________________________________
a) In the outbound delivery, choose Outbound Delivery > Save . The documentnumber is assigned internally by the system.
5. Pick the delivery and post the goods issue. To do so, create a transfer order usingthe following information:
Field Name Value
Warehouse Number 010Delivery Number of your outbound deliveryForeground/Background Background
Solution 37: Create a Credit Memo Request.
Field Name Value
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 37
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 527/740
Adopt Pick Quantity 2 (include pick quantities in deliveryand post GI)
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Picking > Create Transfer Order > SingleDocument.
b) Enter the relevant information on the initial screen of the transaction.
c) Press ENTER to allow the system to create the transfer order.
6. Create the billing document with reference to the outbound delivery. Make a noteof the document number.
___________________________________
Solution 37: Create a Credit Memo Request.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 37
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 528/740
Billing > Billing Document > Create.b) Enter the number of the outbound delivery on the initial screen.
c) Choose Billing document > Save . The document number is assigned internallyby the system.
7. The customer complains that 1 headlight does not work. Create a correspondingcredit memo request with reference to the sales order based on the followinginformation:
Field Name Value
Order Type CRSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12
Solution 37: Create a Credit Memo Request.
Field Name Value
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 37
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 529/740
Division 00
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create.
b) Enter the order type and the organizational data on the initial screen of the
transaction.c) Choose Sales document > Create with Reference .
d) Select the Order tab page.
e) Enter the number of the sales order.
f) Choose Item Selection .
Solution 37: Create a Credit Memo Request.
g) On the selection list, reduce the quantity to 1 piece.
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 37
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 530/740
h) Choose Edit > Copy to copy the item to the credit memo request.
8. Maintain Damaged in transit as the order reason.
a) In the credit memo request, choose the Sales tab page.
b) Choose the order reason in the respective field.
9. Save the credit memo request and record the document number.___________________________________
a) Choose Sales document > Save . The document number is assigned internallyby the system.
10. Release the credit memo request for billing by removing the billing block.a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Sales > Order > Change.
Solution 37: Create a Credit Memo Request.
b) Enter the number of the credit memo request on the initial screen of the
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 37
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 531/740
transaction.c) Press ENTER to call the document details.
d) Select the Sales or Item overview tab page.
e) Remove the billing block by choosing the last (empty) entry in thecorresponding drop-down list.
f) Choose Sales document > Save to adopt the change.
11. Create the credit memo for the credit memo request and make a note of thedocument number.___________________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Billing > Billing Document > Create.
Solution 37: Create a Credit Memo Request.
b) Enter the number of the credit memo request on the initial screen of the
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 37
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 532/740
transaction.c) Choose Billing document > Save to create the credit memo. The document
number is assigned internally by the system.
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Create a credit memo request
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 533/740
Lesson 2: Cancelling Billing Documents
Lesson Objectives
Af l i hi l ill b bl
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 534/740
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Cancel a billing document
TSCM60_1 Figure 97: Canceling a Billing Document Unit 9 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 535/740
Exercise 38: Cancel a Billing Document.Sometimes billing documents have to be canceled due to errors in the document (for
l d t i t t d t )
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Exercise 38
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 536/740
example, errors due to incorrect master data).1. Cancel the credit memo that you created during the last exercise.
2. Display the document flow for your credit memo. Make a note of the number of thecancellation document.__________________________________
Solution 38: Cancel a Billing Document.Sometimes billing documents have to be canceled due to errors in the document (for
l d t i t t d t )
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 38
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 537/740
example, errors due to incorrect master data).1. Cancel the credit memo that you created during the last exercise.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Billing > Billing Document > Cancel.
b) Enter the document number of the credit memo on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Choose Billing document > Save to cancel the credit memo.
2. Display the document flow for your credit memo. Make a note of the number of thecancellation document.__________________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Billing > Billing Document > Display.
Solution 38: Cancel a Billing Document.
b) Enter the number of the credit memo on the screen.
c) Choose Environment > Display document flow You can find the number of the
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 38
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 538/740
c) Choose Environment > Display document flow . You can find the number of thecreated cancellation document in the document flow.
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Cancel a billing document
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 539/740
Lesson 3: Creating Invoice Correction Requests
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson you will be able to:
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Lesson 3
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 540/740
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Create an invoice correction request
TSCM60_1 Figure 98: Processing Invoice Corrections Unit 9 Lesson 3
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 541/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 99: Invoice Correction Procedure Unit 9 Lesson 3
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 542/740
Exercise 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.A customer orders headlights. The material is delivered on time and billed accordingly.However, the customer complains that an agreed discount has not been taken intoaccount on the invoice You use an invoice correction request to resolve this issue
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Exercise 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 543/740
account on the invoice. You use an invoice correction request to resolve this issue.
1. Create a sales order using the following information:Field Name Value
Order Type OR
Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 9-222
Requested delivery date in 10 daysMaterial T-AS1##
Exercise 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.
Field Name Value
Order quantity 5 pieces
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Exercise 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 544/740
Order quantity 5 pieces
Ensure that no customer discount is recorded in the sales order.
2. Save the order and write down the document number.________________________________
3. Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order using the followinginformation:Field Name Value
Shipping point Z0##Selection date in 20 days
Order Your order number
Exercise 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.
4. Save the outbound delivery and record the document number.
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Exercise 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 545/740
________________________________5. Pick the delivery and post the goods issue. To do so, create a transfer order using
the following information:Field Name Value
Warehouse Number 010
Delivery Number of your outbound deliveryForeground/Background BackgroundAdopt Pick Quantity 2 (include pick quantities in delivery
and post GI)
6. Create the billing document with reference to the outbound delivery. Make a noteof the document number.___________________________________
Exercise 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.
7. The customer complains that an agreed discount is missing on the invoice. Createa corresponding invoice correction request with reference to the billing document,based on the following information:
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Exercise 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 546/740
based on the following information:Field Name Value
Order Type RKSales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00
8. How many items does the document contain?______________
9. Maintain Price discrepancy: price was too high as the order reason.
Exercise 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.
10. Record a customer-specific discount of 10% in item 20 using the condition typeK007.
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Exercise 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 547/740
11. What is the net value of the document?______________
12. Save the invoice correction request and record the document number.___________________________________
13. Release the invoice correction request for billing by removing the billing block.
14. Create the credit memo for the invoice correction request and make a note of thedocument number.___________________________________
Solution 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.A customer orders headlights. The material is delivered on time and billed accordingly.However, the customer complains that an agreed discount has not been taken intoaccount on the invoice. You use an invoice correction request to resolve this issue.
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 548/740
q
1. Create a sales order using the following information:
Field Name Value
Order Type OR
Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Purchase order number 9-222
Requested delivery date in 10 daysMaterial T-AS1##
Solution 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.
Field Name Value
Order quantity 5 pieces
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 549/740
Ensure that no customer discount is recorded in the sales order.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the order details.
d) Maintain the relevant information.
e) Double-click item 10 to call the item details.f) Choose the Conditions tab page.
Solution 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.
g) If the system has determined a customer discount (for example, usingcondition type K007), select the corresponding line and choose Delete Row .
2 S h d d i d h d b
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 550/740
2. Save the order and write down the document number.________________________________
a) In the sales order, choose Sales document > Save . The document number isassigned internally by the system.
3. Create an outbound delivery for the previous sales order using the followinginformation:
Field Name Value
Shipping point Z0##Selection date in 20 days
Order Your order number
Solution 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Outbound Delivery > Create > Single Document >With Reference to Sales Order .
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 551/740
b) Enter the relevant information on the initial screen of the transaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the document details.
4. Save the outbound delivery and record the document number.________________________________
a) In the outbound delivery, choose Outbound Delivery > Save . The documentnumber is assigned internally by the system.
5. Pick the delivery and post the goods issue. To do so, create a transfer order usingthe following information:
Solution 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.
Field Name Value
Warehouse Number 010D li N b f tb d d li
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 552/740
Delivery Number of your outbound deliveryForeground/Background BackgroundAdopt Pick Quantity 2 (include pick quantities in delivery
and post GI)
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Shipping and Transportation > Picking > Create Transfer Order > SingleDocument.
b) Enter the relevant information on the initial screen of the transaction.
c) Press ENTER to allow the system to create the transfer order.
Solution 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.
6. Create the billing document with reference to the outbound delivery. Make a noteof the document number.___________________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 553/740
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Billing > Billing Document> Create.
b) Enter the number of the outbound delivery on the initial screen.
c) Choose Billing document > Save . The document number is assigned internallyby the system.
7. The customer complains that an agreed discount is missing on the invoice. Createa corresponding invoice correction request with reference to the billing document,based on the following information:
Field Name ValueOrder Type RK
Solution 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.
Field Name Value
Sales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 554/740
Distribution Channel 12Division 00
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create.
b) Enter the order type and the organizational data on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Choose Sales document > Create with Reference .
d) Enter the number of the billing document in the dialog box.
e) Choose Copy .
Solution 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.
8. How many items does the document contain?______________
a) The document contains two items whose amounts annul each other
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 555/740
a) The document contains two items whose amounts annul each other.
9. Maintain Price discrepancy: price was too high as the order reason.
a) In the invoice correction request, choose the Sales tab page.
b) Choose the order reason in the respective field.
10. Record a customer-specific discount of 10% in item 20 using the condition typeK007.
a) Double-click item 20 to call the item details.
b) Choose the Conditions tab page.
c) In the first empty line, enter condition type K007 and an amount of 10 (%).
Solution 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.
d) Press ENTER to adopt the discount.
11. What is the net value of the document?
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 556/740
______________
a) Navigate to the overview screen.
b) The net value of the document corresponds to the value of the granteddiscount.
12. Save the invoice correction request and record the document number.___________________________________
a) Choose Sales document > Save . The document number is assigned internallyby the system.
13. Release the invoice correction request for billing by removing the billing block.
Solution 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Change.
b) Enter the number of the invoice correction request on the initial screen of the
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 557/740
b) Enter the number of the invoice correction request on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the document details.
d) Select the Sales or Item overview tab page.
e) Remove the billing block by choosing the last (empty) entry in thecorresponding dropdown list.
f) Choose Sales document > Save to adopt the change.
14. Create the credit memo for the invoice correction request and make a note of the
document number.___________________________________
Solution 39: Create an Invoice Correction Request.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Billing > Billing Document > Create.
b) Enter the number of the invoice correction request on the initial screen of the
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 39
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 558/740
) qtransaction.
c) Choose Billing document > Save to create the credit memo. The documentnumber is assigned internally by the system.
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Create an invoice correction request
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 559/740
Lesson 4: Creating Returns
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Lesson 4
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 560/740
● Create returns
TSCM60_1 Figure 100: Returns Processing Unit 9 Lesson 4
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 561/740
Exercise 40: Create a Return.A customer contacts you and informs you that he has bought too many headlights. Thecustomer wants to return them to get the money back. Since you do very good businesswith this customer, you agree that the material can be sent back and that the customerwill be credited with the amount paid.
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Exercise 40
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 562/740
will be credited with the amount paid.
1. Create a returns document using the following information:Field Name Value
Order Type RESales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Material T-AS1##Quantity 5 pieces
Exercise 40: Create a Return.
Field Name Value
Order reason Quantity discrepancy
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Exercise 40
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 563/740
2. Save the returns document and record the document number._____________________________
3. The headlights have arrived. Create the returns delivery document for theheadlight using the following information:Field Name Value
Shipping Point Z0##Order Number of the return document
4. Post the goods receipt and make a note of the returns delivery document number.____________________________
Exercise 40: Create a Return.
5. Check the stock overview for the headlight in plant 1000. To which kind of specialstock has the quantity of the material been posted?____________________________
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Exercise 40
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 564/740
6. Release the returns document for billing by removing the billing block.
7. Create the credit memo with reference to the returns document and make a noteof the document number.____________________________
Solution 40: Create a Return.A customer contacts you and informs you that he has bought too many headlights. Thecustomer wants to return them to get the money back. Since you do very good businesswith this customer, you agree that the material can be sent back and that the customerwill be credited with the amount paid.
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 40
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 565/740
p
1. Create a returns document using the following information:
Field Name Value
Order Type RESales Organization 1000Distribution Channel 12Division 00Sold-to party T-S50A##Material T-AS1##Quantity 5 pieces
Solution 40: Create a Return.
Field Name Value
Order reason Quantity discrepancy
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 40
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 566/740
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Create .
b) Enter the order type and the organizational units on the initial screen of thetransaction.
c) Press ENTER to call the document details.
d) Maintain the relevant information.
2. Save the returns document and record the document number._____________________________
a) Choose Sales document > Save . The document number is assigned internallyby the system.
Solution 40: Create a Return.
3. The headlights have arrived. Create the returns delivery document for theheadlight using the following information:
Field Name Value
Shipping Point Z0##
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 40
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 567/740
Shipping Point Z0##Order Number of the return document
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Shipping and Transportation > Outbound Delivery > Create > Single Document >With Reference to Sales Order .
b) Enter the shipping point and the document number on the initial screen.
c) Press ENTER to call the delivery details.
4. Post the goods receipt and make a note of the returns delivery document number.____________________________
Solution 40: Create a Return.
a) In the delivery, choose Edit > Post Goods Receipt . The document is savedautomatically and the number is assigned internally by the system.
5. Check the stock overview for the headlight in plant 1000. To which kind of specialstock has the quantity of the material been posted?
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 40
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 568/740
stock has the quantity of the material been posted?____________________________
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Materials Management >Inventory Management > Environment > Stock > Stock Overview.
b) Enter the material number and the plant on the initial screen of the transaction.
c) Choose Program > Execute to navigate to the stock overview.
d) Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the screen and scroll to the right. Thequantity has been posted to the returns stock.
6. Release the returns document for billing by removing the billing block.
Solution 40: Create a Return.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales > Order > Change.
b) Enter the document number on the screen.
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 40
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 569/740
c) Press ENTER to call the document details.
d) Choose the Sales or Item overview tab page.
e) Remove the billing block by choosing the last entry (blank) from the drop-downlist.
f) Choose Sales document > Save to adopt the change.
7. Create the credit memo with reference to the returns document and make a noteof the document number.
____________________________
Solution 40: Create a Return.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Billing > Billing Document > Create.
b) Enter the number of the returns document on the initial screen.
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Solution 40
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 570/740
c) Choose Billing document > Save .
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Create returns
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 571/740
Lesson 5: Performing Advanced Returns Management
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
Perform ad anced ret rns management
TSCM60_1 Unit 9 Lesson 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 572/740
● Perform advanced returns management
TSCM60_1 Figure 101: Document Flow in the Advanced
Returns Management
Unit 9 Lesson 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 573/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 102: Screen Layout of Returns Overview Unit 9 Lesson 5
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 574/740
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Perform advanced returns management
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 575/740
Unit 10: Lists and Analytics for Sales and DistributionProcesses
Lesson 1: Using Lists and Reports
Lesson 2: Performing Analyses in Sales and Distribution
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 576/740
Lesson 1: Using Lists and Reports
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Explain the sources of information in Sales and Distribution
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 577/740
Explain the sources of information in Sales and Distribution
● Analyze data using lists and reports
TSCM60_1 Figure 103: Sources of Sales and Distribution
Information
Unit 10 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 578/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 104: Lists and Reports Unit 10 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 579/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 105: How to Use Standard Document Lists Unit 10 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 580/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 106: Documents with a Specific Status Unit 10 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 581/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 107: Processing Worklists Unit 10 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 582/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 108: Document Flow Unit 10 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 583/740
Exercise 41: Analyze Data Using Lists and Reports.During daily business, it is essential for sales employees that they can find certain salesdocuments in the system (for example, incomplete orders or open quotations). To do this,
they can use several lists and reports that are available in SAP ERP. You will now work withthe list of sales orders as an example.
1 Check whether there are any open orders for material T AS3## for the current and
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Exercise 41
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 584/740
1. Check whether there are any open orders for material T-AS3## for the current andthe past month. Use a suitable list to do this.
2. Display a list of all the orders that have been created for material T-AS1## in the
course of this month.3. Branch to an order and enter the employee Melanie Mayer (personnel number
1701) as a sales representative. Return to the list.
Hint:You can branch to an order by double-clicking the entry.
Exercise 41: Analyze Data Using Lists and Reports.
4. Choose the display variant Order item .
5. Sort the list in ascending order based on sold-to party numbers.
6. Restrict the list to standard orders.
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Exercise 41
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 585/740
7. Determine the net value that has been obtained for this material in the given periodof time.
8. Move the document number column to the left end of the list and delete thepurchasing order column from the list.
9. Include the information on the plant and shipping point at the end of the list.
10. Display subtotals for each sold-to party.
11. Save your processed list as a user-specific display variant with the name: Layout
SCM6 -## and the description Order list ## .
Exercise 41: Analyze Data Using Lists and Reports.
12. Set your layout SCM600-## as the initial variant.
13. Send the list including a short note as express mail to another course participant,and a copy to yourself.
14. Call the list using your variant and material T-AS2##.
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Exercise 41
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 586/740
g y
Solution 41: Analyze Data Using Lists and Reports.During daily business, it is essential for sales employees that they can find certain salesdocuments in the system (for example, incomplete orders or open quotations). To do this,
they can use several lists and reports that are available in SAP ERP. You will now work withthe list of sales orders as an example.
1 Check whether there are any open orders for material T-AS3## for the current and
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 41
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 587/740
1. Check whether there are any open orders for material T-AS3## for the current andthe past month. Use a suitable list to do this.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >
Sales > Information System > Orders > List of Sales Orders.b) Enter T-AS3## in the Material field.
c) Choose Open sales orders .
d) Maintain the time slot using the Document Date fields.
e) Press ENTER to confirm the selection criteria and to populate the list.
Solution 41: Analyze Data Using Lists and Reports.
2. Display a list of all the orders that have been created for material T-AS1## in thecourse of this month.
a) In the list, choose Goto > Back to navigate back to the selection screen.
b) Enter T-AS1## in the Material field.
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 41
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 588/740
c) Enter appropriate document dates.
d) Choose All orders .
e) Press ENTER to confirm the selection criteria and to populate the list.
3. Branch to an order and enter the employee Melanie Mayer (personnel number1701) as a sales representative. Return to the list.
Hint:You can branch to an order by double-clicking the entry.
Solution 41: Analyze Data Using Lists and Reports.
a) Double-click one of the selected sales orders.
b) Choose Goto > Header > Partner .
c) Enter partner function: Sales employee with partner (personnel) number 1701.
d) Choose Save and to navigate back to the list
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 41
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 589/740
d) Choose Save and to navigate back to the list.
4. Choose the display variant Order item .
a) Choose Settings > Layouts > Choose .b) Choose Order item .
c) Take a look at the layout now containing item information, for example materialnumber and quantity.
5. Sort the list in ascending order based on sold-to party numbers.
a) Select the Sold-to party column.
Solution 41: Analyze Data Using Lists and Reports.
b) Choose Sort in ascending order .
6. Restrict the list to standard orders.
a) Select the Sales Document Type column.
b) Choose Set filter
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 41
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 590/740
b) Choose Set filter .
c) Enter sales document type OR .
d) Choose ENTER (Execute).7. Determine the net value that has been obtained for this material in the given period
of time.
a) Select the Net value column.
b) Choose Add up values .
8. Move the document number column to the left end of the list and delete thepurchasing order column from the list.
Solution 41: Analyze Data Using Lists and Reports.
a) Choose Current... .
b) From the Displayed Columns section, select the Sales Document entry.
c) Choose Selected Fields Up several times.
d) Optionally you can use drag and drop to move entries up and down
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 41
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 591/740
d) Optionally, you can use drag and drop to move entries up and down.
e) From the Displayed Columns section, select the Purchase order number field.
f) Choose Hide selected fields . g) Optionally, you can use drag and drop to move entries from left to right.
h) Choose Adopt (ENTER).
9. Include the information on the plant and shipping point at the end of the list.
a) Choose Current... .
Solution 41: Analyze Data Using Lists and Reports.
b) From the Column Set section, select the fields Plant and Shipping Point/Receiving Pt .
c) Choose Show selected fields n.
d) Move the two fields down using Selected Fields Down .
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 41
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 592/740
e) Choose Adopt (ENTER).
10. Display subtotals for each sold-to party.
a) Select the Sold-to party column.
b) Choose Subtotal .
11. Save your processed list as a user-specific display variant with the name: LayoutSCM6 -## and the description Order list ## .
a) Choose Settings > Layouts > Save .
Solution 41: Analyze Data Using Lists and Reports.
b) Enter the layout SCM6 -## with the name Order list ## .
c) Select the User-Specific check-box.
d) Choose Adopt (ENTER).
12 Set your layout SCM600-## as the initial variant
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 41
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 593/740
12. Set your layout SCM600 ## as the initial variant.
a) Choose Settings > Layouts > Administration .
b) Select your layout and choose Define default setting .c) Choose Save .
d) Choose Goto > Back .
13. Send the list including a short note as express mail to another course participant,and a copy to yourself.
a) Choose List > Save > Office .
Solution 41: Analyze Data Using Lists and Reports.
b) Enter any message text.
c) Enter any SCM600-## user ID into the Recipient column.
d) Enter your user ID as recipient as well.
e) Select the Express mail check-box, which you can find next to the Recipient
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 41
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 594/740
e) Select the Express mail check box, which you can find next to the RecipientType drop-down list.
f) Choose Document > Send .
14. Call the list using your variant and material T-AS2##.
a) Restart the transaction by choosing Logistics > Sales and Distribution > Sales >Information System > Orders > List of Sales Orders from the SAP Easy Accessmenu.
b) Enter the material number on the initial screen.
Solution 41: Analyze Data Using Lists and Reports.
c) Press ENTER to populate the list. The list is started using your display variant.
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 41
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 595/740
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Explain the sources of information in Sales and Distribution
● Analyze data using lists and reports
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 596/740
Lesson 2: Performing Analyses in Sales and Distribution
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Analyze data using the Sales Information System (SIS)
E l i d l i i h SAP B i W h
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 597/740
● Explain data analysis in the SAP Business Warehouse
TSCM60_1 Figure 109: Information Systems in SAP ERP Unit 10 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 598/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 110: Information Systems of the LIS Unit 10 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 599/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 111: Data Warehouse Concepts Unit 10 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 600/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 112: Composition of InformationStructures
Unit 10 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 601/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 113: Information Structures in SD Unit 10 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 602/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 114: Standard Analyses Unit 10 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 603/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 115: Flexible Analyses Unit 10 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 604/740
Exercise 42: Analyze Data Using the Sales Information System(SIS).You will run standard analyses using the Sales Information System and test the various
reporting functions.1. Review the customer sales history for this month by performing a standard
customer analysis for all customers in sales organization 1000 and distributionchannel 12 Save your selection as selection variant KA-##
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Exercise 42
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 605/740
channel 12. Save your selection as selection variant KA ##.
Hint:
Make sure that the Division field is blank on the selection screen.
2. Change the analysis settings to display the customer number and the customername.
3. Note down the value of the incoming orders for customer T-S50A##. Do not exit
the analysis.Incoming orders T-S50A##: ______________________________
Exercise 42: Analyze Data Using the Sales Information System(SIS).
4. Drill down the analysis to the bottom level. Note down the characteristics that are
used in the analysis.Level of Hierarchy Characteristic
1.
2
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Exercise 42
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 606/740
2.
3.
4.5.
6.
Exercise 42: Analyze Data Using the Sales Information System(SIS).
Hint:To reach the next level of the analysis, place the cursor on a characteristic in theleft-hand column and choose Detail . Optionally, double-click the characteristic.
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Exercise 42
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 607/740
5. Compare the sequence recorded above with the standard drilldown for thisanalysis.
6. Display a list of all possible key figures for your customer T-S50A##. Note downtwo key figures with values that are not included in your display (for example, costsfor incoming orders and sales volume).Key Figure Value
1.
2.
Exercise 42: Analyze Data Using the Sales Information System(SIS).
7. Add the key figures Incoming orders quantity and Billing quantity to your standard
analysis.8. Compare the two key figures Sales and Invoiced Sales: Cost . Note down the totals
for these two values and the percentage difference from both key figures.Sales:
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Exercise 42
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 608/740
Sales: ____________________________________________Invoiced sales: cost ____________________________________________
%: ______________________________________________9. Close the comparison. Change the drilldown to show the data broken down by
material.
10. Create a Top 3 list of your materials by sales and display the results aspercentages.
Solution 42: Analyze Data Using the Sales Information System(SIS).You will run standard analyses using the Sales Information System and test the various
reporting functions.1. Review the customer sales history for this month by performing a standard
customer analysis for all customers in sales organization 1000 and distributionchannel 12. Save your selection as selection variant KA-##.
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 42
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 609/740
y
Hint:
Make sure that the Division field is blank on the selection screen.
a) From the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Logistics > Sales and Distribution >Sales Information System > Standard Analyses > Customer .
b) Enter the selection criteria.
c) Remove any entry in the Division field.
Solution 42: Analyze Data Using the Sales Information System(SIS).
d) Choose Goto > Variants > Save as Variant .
e) Enter KA-## as the variant name and any description.
f) Choose Variant > Save .
g) Choose Customer Analysis > Execute to start the analysis
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 42
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 610/740
g) Choose Customer Analysis > Execute to start the analysis.
2. Change the analysis settings to display the customer number and the customer
name.a) Choose Settings > Characteristic display > Key and description .
3. Note down the value of the incoming orders for customer T-S50A##. Do not exitthe analysis.Incoming orders T-S50A##: ______________________________
a) The values are in the Total line and the Incoming orders column.
Solution 42: Analyze Data Using the Sales Information System(SIS).
4. Drill down the analysis to the bottom level. Note down the characteristics that are
used in the analysis.Level of Hierarchy Characteristic
1.
2.
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 42
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 611/740
2.
3.
4.5.
6.
Solution 42: Analyze Data Using the Sales Information System(SIS).
Hint:To reach the next level of the analysis, place the cursor on a characteristic in theleft-hand column and choose Detail . Optionally, double-click the characteristic.
a) Double-click the characteristics until you reach the last level
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 42
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 612/740
a) Double click the characteristics until you reach the last level.
b) The different characteristics are sold-to party, month, sales organization,
distribution channel, division, and material.
5. Compare the sequence recorded above with the standard drilldown for thisanalysis.
a) Choose Extras > Display standard drilldown .The recorded sequence corresponds to the standard drilldown.
Solution 42: Analyze Data Using the Sales Information System(SIS).
6. Display a list of all possible key figures for your customer T-S50A##. Note downtwo key figures with values that are not included in your display (for example, costsfor incoming orders and sales volume).
Key Figure Value
1.
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 42
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 613/740
2.
a) Place the cursor on the value for a key figure of the customer.
b) Choose Extras > All Key Figures .
7. Add the key figures Incoming orders quantity and Billing quantity to your standardanalysis.
a) On the main screen of the analysis, choose Edit > Choose key figures .
Solution 42: Analyze Data Using the Sales Information System(SIS).
b) Find the key figures mentioned in the exercise and move them to the Selectioncriteria section using the Choose icon.
c) Choose Continue (ENTER).
8. Compare the two key figures Sales and Invoiced Sales: Cost . Note down the totalsfor these two values and the percentage difference from both key figures
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 42
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 614/740
for these two values and the percentage difference from both key figures.Sales: ____________________________________________
Invoiced sales: cost ____________________________________________%: ______________________________________________
a) Place the cursor on the header of the Sales column.
b) Choose Edit > Comparisons > Two key figures.
c) Select Invoiced sls: cost .
Solution 42: Analyze Data Using the Sales Information System(SIS).
d) Choose Continue (ENTER).
e) The relevant values are displayed on the screen.
9. Close the comparison. Change the drilldown to show the data broken down bymaterial.
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 42
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 615/740
a) Choose Close to close the comparison.
b) Choose View > Switch drilldown > Material .c) Choose Continue (ENTER).
10. Create a Top 3 list of your materials by sales and display the results aspercentages.
a) Place the cursor in the Sales field.
Solution 42: Analyze Data Using the Sales Information System(SIS).
b) Choose View > Top N .
c) Enter 3 in the Number field.
d) Choose Continue (ENTER).
e) Choose Settings > Value display > Percent .
TSCM60_1 Unit 10 Solution 42
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 616/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 116: BI Architecture Unit 10 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 617/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 117: SAP NetWeaver BI Info Providers Unit 10 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 618/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 118: BI Content Unit 10 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 619/740
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 620/740
Unit 11: Enterprise Structures in Sales and Distribution
Lesson 1: Setting Up Enterprise Structures
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 621/740
Lesson 1: Setting Up Enterprise Structures
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Set up enterprise structures
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 622/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 119: Enterprise Structures in the SAPSystem
Unit 11 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 623/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 120: Integration of Sales in FinancialAccounting
Unit 11 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 624/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 121: Organizational Structures in Sales Unit 11 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 625/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 122: Sales Organization Unit 11 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 626/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 123: Distribution Channel Unit 11 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 627/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 124: Division Unit 11 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 628/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 125: Sales Area Unit 11 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 629/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 126: Sales Office and Sales Group Unit 11 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 630/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 127: Plant Unit 11 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 631/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 128: Delivering Plant Unit 11 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 632/740
Exercise 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.Business Example
You are part of the project team that is implementing the SAP system at your company.As the employee responsible for sales, you need to understand the structure that hasalready been created and verify the settings. You have to expand the existing enterprisestructure for your sales organization to include the new eSales distribution channel.
Hint:The required settings are located in Customizing for Enterprise Structure You can find some
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Exercise 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 633/740
The required settings are located in Customizing for Enterprise Structure . You can find someof the organizational data in Sales and Distribution and other data in the Financial Accounting ,Logistics - General , and logical execution areas.
Set up your enterprise structures for sales and distribution in the SAP system.
Task 1
1. Navigate to the definition of the organizational units and complete the Enterprise
Structures data sheet.
Exercise 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
2.
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Exercise 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 634/740
Exercise 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
What is the description of your sales organization 1000? Which currency is used to updatethe statistics? What is the name and the address of the sales organization?
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Exercise 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 635/740
Exercise 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
3.
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Exercise 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 636/740
Exercise 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
Which distribution channels have been defined for Final customer sale and Service ?
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Exercise 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 637/740
Exercise 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
4.
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Exercise 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 638/740
Exercise 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
Which division has been created for the Cross-division sales?
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Exercise 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 639/740
Exercise 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
Task 2
Familiarize yourself with the enterprise structures that are relevant for sales and that havebeen configured as organizational structures.
1. Navigate to the assignment of the organizational units and complete the EnterpriseStructure data sheet.
2 The organizational units determined above have been used to configure various
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Exercise 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 640/740
2. The organizational units determined above have been used to configure various
sales areas for your sales organization 1000 .Which sales areas have been defined?SalesOrganization
DistributionChannel
Division
The sales area 1000
The sales area 1000
Exercise 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
3. Determine the sales offices responsible for managing sales in the sales area 1000/10/00 .
4. Add some examples of the sales groups assigned to the sales offices that you listed.
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Exercise 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 641/740
Exercise 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
5. Which company code does your sales organization belong to?
Which currency is defined for this company code?
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Exercise 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 642/740
6. Enter the delivering plants that are assigned to the sales organization 1000 and thedistribution channel 10 in your data sheet.
Task 3Optional:
Exercise 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.To meet the goal of establishing new sales possibilities, the management has approved aproject for establishing eSales as a new sales channel at your company. The managementwants to track the sales and revenues from these transactions separately. In addition,
pricing procedures that are different from all other sales processes must be possible.Configure the new organizational units that you will need.
1. Create a new distribution channel for eSales.
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Exercise 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 643/740
Exercise 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
Hint:Use the Define distribution channel function. Do not use the Copy, delete, check
distribution channel function.Background:
The Define distribution channel function (only) creates a new distribution channel.The Copy, delete, check distribution channel function is a much more powerfulfunction and it allows you to copy all the distribution channel-specific settingsf h l Y l f hi h i i l Thi f i
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Exercise 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 644/740
from the template. You can also perform this synchronization later. This function
is extremely useful in projects. However, in this course, you are responsible forperforming the corresponding Customizing steps yourself.
Distribution channel: Y = 70 + ## (for example, for group 19: Y = 70 + 19 = 89)Description: eSales ##
Exercise 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
2. A separate team of employees is being trained to process the orders that arereceived through eSales. Organizationally, these employees will be grouped in asales office. Set up the new sales office Ze## eOffice ## for this group. Use the
sales office 1000 as a template.
Task 4
Optional:Enhance the existing sales organization structures by integrating the new organizational
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Exercise 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 645/740
Enhance the existing sales organization structures by integrating the new organizationalunits.
1. Assign the new distribution channel to your sales organization Z000 .
2. Build new sales areas with your sales organization Z000 ; the new distributionchannel; and the divisions 00 , 01 , and 07 .
Exercise 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
3. Ensure that deliveries for orders from the new sales areas can take place at yourdistribution centers at the Hamburg , Dresden , and Stuttgart plants.
4. Configure Customizing so that the orders that are entered for your new sales area Z000/ Y / 00 can be assigned to your new sales office ZE## eOffice ## .
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Exercise 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 646/740
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.Business Example
You are part of the project team that is implementing the SAP system at your company.As the employee responsible for sales, you need to understand the structure that hasalready been created and verify the settings. You have to expand the existing enterprisestructure for your sales organization to include the new eSales distribution channel.
Hint:The required settings are located in Customizing for Enterprise Structure . You can find someof the organizational data in Sales and Distribution and other data in the Financial Accounting
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 647/740
of the organizational data in Sales and Distribution and other data in the Financial Accounting ,
Logistics - General , and logical execution areas.
Set up your enterprise structures for sales and distribution in the SAP system.
Task 1
1. Navigate to the definition of the organizational units and complete the Enterprise
Structures data sheet.
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
a) Go to Customizing for Enterprise Structure under Definition → Sales andDistribution → Define, copy, delete, check sales organization .
2.
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 648/740
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
What is the description of your sales organization 1000? Which currency is used to updatethe statistics? What is the name and the address of the sales organization?.
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 649/740
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
a) In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Define Sales Organization .
b) On the Change View “Sales organizations”: Overview screen, double-click SOrg. 1000 .
c) On the Change View “Sales organizations”: Details screen, the system displaysthe following data:
Field Name or Data Type Value
Sales Organization 1000 Germany Frankfurt
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 650/740
Statistics currency EUR
d) Choose the Address pushbutton. The system displays the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Value
Name IDES Deutschl-Ffrn
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
Field Name or Data Type Value
Street/House number Friedrich-Naumann-Straße 16
Postal Code/City 60486 Frankfurt/M
3.
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 651/740
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
Which distribution channels have been defined for Final customer sale and Service ?.
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 652/740
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
a) Go to Customizing for Enterprise Structure under Definition → Sales andDistribution → Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel .
b) In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Define distribution channel .
c) On the Change View “Distribution channels”: Overview screen, the systemdisplays the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Distribution Channel
Final customer sales 10
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 653/740
Service 14
4.
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
Which division has been created for the Cross-division sales?.
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 654/740
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
a) Go to Customizing for Enterprise Structure under Definition → Logistics -General → Define, copy, delete, check division .
b) In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Define Division .
c) On the Change View “Divisions”: Overview screen, the system displays thefollowing data:
Division Name
Cross-division 00
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 655/740
Task 2
Familiarize yourself with the enterprise structures that are relevant for sales and that havebeen configured as organizational structures.
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
1. Navigate to the assignment of the organizational units and complete the EnterpriseStructure data sheet.
a) Go to Customizing for Enterprise Structure under Assignment → Sales andDistribution → Set up sales area .
2. The organizational units determined above have been used to configure varioussales areas for your sales organization 1000 .Which sales areas have been defined?
Sales Distribution Division
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 656/740
Organization ChannelThe sales area 1000
The sales area 1000
a) On the Change View “Assignment Sales Org. - Distribution Channel - Division” :screen, the system displays the following data:
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
Sales Organization Distribution Channel Division
1000 10 00
1000 14 00
3. Determine the sales offices responsible for managing sales in the sales area 1000/10/00 .
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 657/740
a) Go to Customizing for Enterprise Structure under Assignment → Sales andDistribution → Assign sales office to sales area .
b) On the Change View “Assignment Sales Office-Sales Area”: Overview screen,choose the Position button and search for sales organization 1000 , distributionchannel 10 , and division 00 . The system displays the following data:
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
Sales Office Name
1000 Office Frankfurt
1010 Office Hamburg
1030 Office Stuttgart
4. Add some examples of the sales groups assigned to the sales offices that you listed.
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 658/740
a) Go to Customizing for Enterprise Structure under Assignment → Sales andDistribution → Assign sales group to sales office . The system displays thefollowing data:
Sales Office Sales Group Description
1000 100 Gr. F1 Mr. Anton
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
Sales Office Sales Group Description
1000 101 Gr. F2 Mr. Mayer
1000 103 Gr. F3 Mr. Ludwig
1010 110 Gr. H1 Mr. Thomas
1010 111 Gr. H2 Mr. Thiel
1030 130 Gr. S1 Ms. Chmiel
1030 131 Gr. S2 Mr. Kaysers
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 659/740
5. Which company code does your sales organization belong to?
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
Which currency is defined for this company code?
a) Go to Customizing for Enterprise Structure under Assignment → Sales andDistribution → Assign sales organization to company code .
b) On the Change View “Assignment Sales Organization - Company Code”:Overview screen, the system displays the following data:
Company Code Company Name
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 660/740
p y p y
1000 IDES AG
c) Go to Customizing for Enterprise Structure under Definition → Financial Accounting → Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code .
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
d) In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Edit Company Code Data .
e) On the Change View “Company Code”: Overview screen, double-click CompanyCode 1000 .
f) On the Change View “Company Code”: Details screen, the system displays thefollowing data:
Field Name or Data Type Value
Currency EUR
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 661/740
6. Enter the delivering plants that are assigned to the sales organization 1000 and thedistribution channel 10 in your data sheet.
a) Go to Customizing for Enterprise Structure under Assignment → Sales andDistribution → Assign sales organization - distribution channel - plant .
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
b) On the Change View “Assignment Sales Organization/Distribution Channel –Plant screen, choose the Position button and search for sales organization 1000and distribution channel 10 . The system displays the following data:
Plant Name 1 1000 Hamburg
1100 Berlin
1200 Dresden
1300 Frankfurt
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 662/740
Task 3
Optional:To meet the goal of establishing new sales possibilities, the management has approved a
project for establishing eSales as a new sales channel at your company. The management
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.wants to track the sales and revenues from these transactions separately. In addition,pricing procedures that are different from all other sales processes must be possible.Configure the new organizational units that you will need.
1. Create a new distribution channel for eSales.
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 663/740
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
Hint:Use the Define distribution channel function. Do not use the Copy, delete, checkdistribution channel function.
Background:
The Define distribution channel function (only) creates a new distribution channel.The Copy, delete, check distribution channel function is a much more powerfulfunction and it allows you to copy all the distribution channel-specific settingsfrom the template. You can also perform this synchronization later. This function
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 664/740
is extremely useful in projects. However, in this course, you are responsible forperforming the corresponding Customizing steps yourself.
Distribution channel: Y = 70 + ## (for example, for group 19: Y = 70 + 19 = 89)Description: eSales ##
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
a) Go to Customizing for Enterprise Structure under Definition → Sales andDistribution → Define, copy, delete, check distribution channel .
b) In the Choose Activity dialog box, choose Define distribution channel .
c) On the Change View “Distribution channels”: Overview screen, choose the NewEntries pushbutton.
d) Enter the following values:
Field Name or Data Type Value
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 665/740
Distribution Channel <70 + ##>Description <eSales ##>
e) Save your new distribution channel details.
2. A separate team of employees is being trained to process the orders that are
received through eSales. Organizationally, these employees will be grouped in a
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
sales office. Set up the new sales office Ze## eOffice ## for this group. Use thesales office 1000 as a template.
a) Go to Customizing for Enterprise Structure under Definition → Sales and
Distribution → Maintain sales office .
b) Choose Sales office 1000 , and choose the Copy As pushbutton.
c) Enter sales office <ZE##> and description <eOffice ##>. Choose the Copypushbutton.
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 666/740
d) On Edit address screen , choose the Copy pushbutton. In the Adjustment of Titleand Name dialog box, choose the Yes pushbutton.
e) Save your new sales office details.
Task 4
Optional:
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.Enhance the existing sales organization structures by integrating the new organizationalunits.
1. Assign the new distribution channel to your sales organization Z000 .
a) Go to Customizing for Enterprise Structure under Assignment → Sales andDistribution → Assign distribution channel to sales organization .
b) On the Change View “Assignment Sales Organization - Distribution Channel”:Overview screen, choose the New Entries pushbutton.
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 667/740
c) Enter the following values:Field Name or Data Type Value
SOrg . Z000
DChl <70 + ##>
d) Save your new distribution channel for your sales organization.
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
2. Build new sales areas with your sales organization Z000 ; the new distributionchannel; and the divisions 00 , 01 , and 07 .
a) Go to Customizing for Enterprise Structure under Assignment → Sales and
Distribution → Set up sales area .
b) On the Change View “Assignment Sales Org. – Distribution Channel - Division” :screen, choose the New Entries pushbutton.
c) Enter the following values:
Sales Organization Distribution Channel Division
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 668/740
Z000 <70 + ##> 00
Z000 <70 + ##> 01
Z000 <70 + ##> 07
d) Save sales areas for your sales organization.
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
3. Ensure that deliveries for orders from the new sales areas can take place at yourdistribution centers at the Hamburg , Dresden , and Stuttgart plants.
a) Go to Customizing for Enterprise Structure under Assignment → Sales and
Distribution → Assign sales organization - distribution channel - plant .b) On the Change View “Assignment Sales Organization/Distribution Channel -
Plant screen, choose the New Entries pushbutton.
c) Enter the following values:
Sales Organization Distribution Channel Plant
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 669/740
Z000 <70 + ##> 1000
Z000 <70 + ##> 1200
Z000 <70 + ##> 1400
d) Save the plant for your sales organization.
Solution 43: Set Up Enterprise Structures.
4. Configure Customizing so that the orders that are entered for your new sales area Z000/ Y / 00 can be assigned to your new sales office ZE## eOffice ## .
a) Go to Customizing for Enterprise Structure under Assignment → Sales and
Distribution → Assign sales office to sales area .b) On the Change View “Assignment Sales office-sales area”: Overview screen,
choose the New Entries pushbutton.
c) Enter Z000 as the sales organization, <70 + ##> as the distribution channel, 00
as the division, and ZE## as the sales office.
TSCM60_1 Unit 11 Solution 43
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 670/740
d) Save your entries.
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Set up enterprise structures
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 671/740
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
"You can assign a sales organization to multiple companycodes and plants."
TSCM60_1 Unit 11
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 672/740
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
"You can assign a sales organization to multiple companycodes and plants."
False
TSCM60_1 Unit 11
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 673/740
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
"Several company codes can use the same chart of accounts."
TSCM60_1 Unit 11
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 674/740
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
"Several company codes can use the same chart of accounts."True
TSCM60_1 Unit 11
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 675/740
Unit 12: Sales Order Processing
Lesson 1: Identifying Sources of Document Data
Lesson 2: Using Additional Functions During Sales Order Processing
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 676/740
Lesson 1: Identifying Sources of Document Data
Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:
● Identify the sources of document data
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 677/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 129: Sources of Document Data Unit 12 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 678/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 130: Proposing Order Data from MasterData
Unit 12 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 679/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 131: Sales Order Entry – Deriving the SalesArea
Unit 12 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 680/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 132: Business Partners from the CustomerMaster
Unit 12 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 681/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 133: Proposing Order Data from theCustomer Master
Unit 12 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 682/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 134: Business Data Unit 12 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 683/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 135: Proposing Plants Automatically Unit 12 Lesson 1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 684/740
Exercise 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.Business Example
To optimize the entry and processing of sales documents, you are required to enter only afew items when creating sales documents. The majority of the information must be copiedfrom the master data.Identify how master data is proposed in sales documents.
Task 1
1. Create a standard order for the product T-ATC## (1 unit) with the purchase ordernumber ##LO605-OR03 . Do not specify the sales area (delete any value that is
suggested by the system). The ship-to party isT-S62F##
.
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Exercise 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 685/740
2. Which sold-to party does the system determine?
Exercise 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
Sold-to party:
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Exercise 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 686/740
Exercise 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
3. Which sales area does the system determine?
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Exercise 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 687/740
Exercise 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
Sales area:
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Exercise 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 688/740
Exercise 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
Where does the system find this information?
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Exercise 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 689/740
Exercise 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
Task 2
Your customer T-S62A## places an order with you. The customer wants the delivery to
take place in two weeks. The purchase order number is ##LO605-OR04 .
1. Enter an item for 5 pieces of the material T-ATC## .You offer the following terms of payment to your customer for this item: 14 days 3%, 30 days 2%, 45 days net .
Terms of payment:
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Exercise 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 690/740
Exercise 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
2. Enter another item for 20 units of the material T-ATD## . This item has differentterms of payment: 20 days 2%, 30 days net .This material must also be delivered to another address. Change the ship-to partyof this item to your customer T-S62B## .
Terms of payment:
3. Deliver the order on the delivery date that is requested by your customer.
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Exercise 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 691/740
Exercise 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
What message appears in the log?
Hint:If necessary, set the selection date for the delivery to two weeks from today.
4. Which delivering plant is determined by the system?
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Exercise 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 692/740
Exercise 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
Delivering plant for the material T-ATC## :
Delivering plant for the material T-ATD## :
5 Which master records does the system use to extract this information?
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Exercise 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 693/740
5. Which master records does the system use to extract this information?
Exercise 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
Task 3
1. Your plant 1000 contains stock for the material T-ATD## . When the customer T-
S62A## in the sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10 orders thecustomer-specific material, the material T-ATD## must be delivered from theplant 1000 . Save the agreement with your customer as a master record.Create a customer-specific material information record so that this material isalways taken from plant 1000 for this customer.
2. The customer manages this material with the number PC-M-## and descriptionPC-Monitor ## .
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Exercise 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 694/740
Enter these details into the customer-specific material information record.
3. You receive an order from the customer T-S62A## with the purchase ordernumber ##LO605OR05 . The customer orders 12 pieces of PC-Monitor ## , which
Exercise 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
the customer manages under the material number PC-M-## . The customer wantsto receive the delivery in two weeks. Create the sales order.Can you meet the requested delivery date? Which plant will be used to supply thedelivery?
Hint:You can use the Ordering Party overview screen to enter items with the purchaseorder numbers of the customer.
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Exercise 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 695/740
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.Business Example
To optimize the entry and processing of sales documents, you are required to enter only afew items when creating sales documents. The majority of the information must be copiedfrom the master data.Identify how master data is proposed in sales documents.
Task 1
1. Create a standard order for the product T-ATC## (1 unit) with the purchase ordernumber ##LO605-OR03 . Do not specify the sales area (delete any value that issuggested by the system). The ship-to party is T-S62F## .
a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 696/740
) y , g→ Sales → Order → Create (VA01 ).
b) On Create Sales Order: Initial Screen , enter OR in the Order Type field andchoose Enter .
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
c) On the Create Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Value
Ship-To Party T-S62F##
PO Number ##LO605-OR03
Material T-ATC##
Order Quantity 1
d) Choose Enter .
2. Which sold-to party does the system determine?
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 697/740
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
Sold-to party:.
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 698/740
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
a) The Sold-To Party field displays T-S62E## HiTech AG .
3. Which sales area does the system determine?
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 699/740
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
Sales area:.
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 700/740
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
Where does the system find this information?.
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 701/740
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
a) The Sales area field displays 1000/10/00 .The system determines the sold-to party from the ship-to party. The sales areais then determined from the sold-to party master record.
Task 2
Your customer T-S62A## places an order with you. The customer wants the delivery totake place in two weeks. The purchase order number is ##LO605-OR04 .
1. Enter an item for 5 pieces of the material T-ATC## .You offer the following terms of payment to your customer for this item:14 days 3% 30 days 2% 45 days net
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 702/740
14 days 3%, 30 days 2%, 45 days net .
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
Terms of payment:
a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Sales and Distribution→ Sales → Order → Create (VA01 ).
b) On Create Sales Order: Initial Screen , enter OR in the Order Type field andchoose Enter .
c) On the Create Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following data:
Field Name or Data Type Value
ld T S62A##
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 703/740
Sold-To Party T-S62A##
PO Number ##LO605-OR04
Material T-ATC##
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
Field Name or Data Type Value
Order Quantity 5
Payment terms ZB01
d) Choose Enter . The system displays the terms of payment as 14 days 3%, 30days 2%, 45 days net .
2. Enter another item for 20 units of the material T-ATD## . This item has differentterms of payment: 20 days 2%, 30 days net .
This material must also be delivered to another address. Change the ship-to partyof this item to your customer T-S62B## .
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 704/740
Terms of payment:
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
a) On the Create Standard Order: Overview screen, enter another material T-
ATD## with quantity 20 . Choose Enter .
b) Double-click to select the line item for the new material and go to the item
Partners tab page. Replace the existing ship-to party with T-S62B## . ChooseEnter . In the dialog boxes that appear, choose Continue . Redetermine theplant/shipping point.
c) Go to the item Billing Document tab page and replace the payment terms byZB03 .
d) Choose Enter . The system displays the terms of payment as 20 days 2%, 30days net .
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 705/740
e) Save the order.
3. Deliver the order on the delivery date that is requested by your customer.
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
What message appears in the log?
Hint:If necessary, set the selection date for the delivery to two weeks from today.
a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Sales andDistribution → Shipping and Transportation → Outbound
Delivery →
Create →
Single Document →
With Reference to Sales Order(VL01N ).
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 706/740
b) On the Create Outbound Delivery with Order Reference screen, enter thefollowing data:
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
Field Name or Data Type Value
Shipping point 1200
Selection date <current date + two weeks>
Order <the order number that wasgenerated by you in the previousstep>
c) Choose Enter .
d) Choose Error →
Log . There is a delivery split for both items because of differentroutes. The two order items are to be delivered to different ship-to parties;which means that each one has to be a separate delivery.
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 707/740
which means that each one has to be a separate delivery.
4. Which delivering plant is determined by the system?
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
Delivering plant for the material T-ATC## :
Delivering plant for the material T-ATD## :
a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Sales andDistribution → Sales → Order → Display (VA03 ).
b) On Display Sales Order: Initial Screen , enter the order number that yougenerated. Choose Enter .
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 708/740
c) Select the item 10 and go to the item shipping. The Plnt field displays 1200 .
d) Select the item 20 and go to the item shipping. The Plnt field displays 1200 .
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
5. Which master records does the system use to extract this information?
Materials master records
Task 3
1. Your plant 1000 contains stock for the material T-ATD## . When the customer T-
S62A## in the sales organization 1000 and distribution channel 10 orders thecustomer-specific material, the material T-ATD## must be delivered from theplant 1000 . Save the agreement with your customer as a master record.Create a customer-specific material information record so that this material isalways taken from plant 1000 for this customer.
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 709/740
y p
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Sales andDistribution → Master Data → Agreements → Customer MaterialInformation → Create (VD51 ).
b) On the Create Customer-Material Info Record screen, enter the following data:Field Name or Data Type Value
Customer T-S62A##
Sales Organization 1000
Distribution Channel 10
c) On Create Customer-Material Info Record: Overview Screen , enter the followingdata:
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 710/740
data:
Field Name or Data Type Value
Material no. T-ATD##
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
Field Name or Data Type Value
Cust. material PC-M-##
d) Choose Enter .2. The customer manages this material with the number PC-M-## and description
PC-Monitor ## .Enter these details into the customer-specific material information record.
a) On Create Customer-Material Info Record: Overview Screen , choose the Info
record details pushbutton.b) On Create Customer-Material Info Record: Item Screen , enter the following data:
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 711/740
Field Name or Data Type Value
Customer Material PC-M-##
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.Field Name or Data Type Value
Customer description PC-Monitor ##
Plant 1000
c) Save the record.
3. You receive an order from the customer T-S62A## with the purchase ordernumber ##LO605OR05 . The customer orders 12 pieces of PC-Monitor ## , whichthe customer manages under the material number PC-M-## . The customer wantsto receive the delivery in two weeks. Create the sales order.Can you meet the requested delivery date? Which plant will be used to supply thedelivery?
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 712/740
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.
Hint:You can use the Ordering Party overview screen to enter items with the purchaseorder numbers of the customer.
a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Sales andDistribution → Sales → Order → Create (VA01 ).
b) On Create Sales Order: Initial Screen , enter OR in the Order Type field andchoose Enter .
c) On the Create Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following data:Field Name or Data Type Value
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 713/740
Sold-To Party T-S62A##
PO Number ##LO605-OR05
Solution 44: Identify Sources of Document Data.Field Name or Data Type Value
Req. deliv.date <current date + two weeks>
d) On theOrdering party
tab page, enter the following data:Field Name or Data Type Value
Customer Material Number PC-M-##
Order Quantity 12
e) Choose Enter . The system displays the plant as 1000 . The requested deliverydate can be met.
f) Save the order
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 44
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 714/740
f) Save the order.
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Identify the sources of document data
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 715/740
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 716/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 136: Sales Summary Unit 12 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 717/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 137: Changes to Sales Documents Unit 12 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 718/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 138: Blocks Unit 12 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 719/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 139: Item Rejection Unit 12 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 720/740
TSCM60_1 Figure 140: Changes to the Sold-To Party in theSales Document
Unit 12 Lesson 2
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 721/740
Exercise 45: Use Additional Functions During Sales OrderProcessing.Business ExampleYour company has implemented the SAP system. As an employee who is responsible forsales order processing, you need to create sales documents. To optimize the process, youmust be required to enter only a few items when creating sales documents and themajority of the information must be copied from the master data.Add another order item to the standard order that is created with reference to thepurchase order number ##LO605-OR05 . Reject the first order item with the purchaseorder number ##LO605-OR05 by entering a relevant reason for rejection.
Task 1Your customer informs you that they would like to add materials to their purchase ordernumber ##LO605-OR05 .
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Exercise 45
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 722/740
1. Enter another item for 16 units of the material T-ATE## . The delivery date is twoweeks from today.
Exercise 45: Use Additional Functions During Sales OrderProcessing.
Task 2
Your customer can get the first order item of the document ##LO605-OR05 for a betterprice somewhere else. Therefore, they reject this item.
1. Cancel this item by entering the relevant reason for rejection.
2. Display the delivery and rejection status for the order.
3. Create a delivery for this order by using the shipping point 1200 . The delivery dateis two weeks from today. Decrease the quantity of the first item in the delivery byhalf.Save the delivery. Check the status of the order.
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Exercise 45
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 723/740
y
Solution 45: Use Additional Functions During Sales OrderProcessing.Business ExampleYour company has implemented the SAP system. As an employee who is responsible forsales order processing, you need to create sales documents. To optimize the process, you
must be required to enter only a few items when creating sales documents and themajority of the information must be copied from the master data.Add another order item to the standard order that is created with reference to thepurchase order number ##LO605-OR05 . Reject the first order item with the purchaseorder number ##LO605-OR05 by entering a relevant reason for rejection.
Task 1Your customer informs you that they would like to add materials to their purchase ordernumber ##LO605-OR05 .
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 45
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 724/740
1. Enter another item for 16 units of the material T-ATE## . The delivery date is twoweeks from today.
Solution 45: Use Additional Functions During Sales OrderProcessing.
a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Sales andDistribution → Sales → Order → Change (VA02 ).
b) Enter the purchase order number ##LO605-OR05 and choose the Searchpushbutton. Select the sales order that you created in the previous exercise.
c) On the Change Sales Order screen, enter another material T-ATE## with 16 asthe quantity.
d) Choose Enter .
Task 2
Y h fi d i f h d ##LO605 OR05 f b
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 45
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 725/740
Your customer can get the first order item of the document ##LO605-OR05 for a betterprice somewhere else. Therefore, they reject this item.
Solution 45: Use Additional Functions During Sales OrderProcessing.
1. Cancel this item by entering the relevant reason for rejection.
a) On the Create Standard Order: Overview screen, choose the Reason for rejectiontab page.
b) For the material T-ATD## , select 03 Too expensive in the Reason for rejectioncolumn.
c) Save the sales order.
2. Display the delivery and rejection status for the order.
a) On Display Sales Order: Initial Screen , in the Order field, enter the order numberof the order that you created.
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 45
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 726/740
b) Choose the Status overview pushbutton.
Solution 45: Use Additional Functions During Sales OrderProcessing.
c) On the Sales Order: Status Overview screen, choose the Expand all pushbutton.The following information is displayed:
Field Name or Data Type Value
Total processing Being processed
Header Status: Delivery Not delivered
Header status: Reject Partially rejected
For item 10, the following information is displayed:
Field Name or Data Type ValueTotal processing Completed
Item Delivery status Not delivered
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 45
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 727/740
Item - Delivery status Not delivered
Solution 45: Use Additional Functions During Sales OrderProcessing.
Field Name or Data Type Value
Item - Rejection status Fully rejected
For item 20, the following information is displayed:
Field Name or Data Type Value
Total processing Open
Item - Delivery status Not delivered
Item - Rejection status Nothing rejected
3. Create a delivery for this order by using the shipping point 1200 . The delivery dateis two weeks from today. Decrease the quantity of the first item in the delivery by
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 45
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 728/740
is two weeks from today. Decrease the quantity of the first item in the delivery byhalf.Save the delivery. Check the status of the order.
Solution 45: Use Additional Functions During Sales OrderProcessing.
a) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Sales andDistribution → Shipping and Transportation → OutboundDelivery → Create → Single Document → With Reference to Sales Order
(VL01N ).b) On the Create Outbound Delivery with Order Reference screen, enter the
following values:
Field Name or Data Type Value
Shipping Point 1200
Selection date <two weeks from current date>Order <enter the order number of the
order that you created>
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 45
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 729/740
Solution 45: Use Additional Functions During Sales OrderProcessing.
c) Choose Enter .
d) On the Delivery Create: Overview screen, enter the following values:
Field Name or Data Type Value Material T-ATE##
Deliv. Qty 8
e) Save the delivery and exit.
f) On the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Logistics → Sales andDistribution → Sales → Order → Display (VA03 ).
g) On Display Sales Order: Initial Screen , in the Order field, enter the order number
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 45
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 730/740
g) p y , ,of the order that you created. Choose the Status overview pushbutton.
Solution 45: Use Additional Functions During Sales OrderProcessing.
h) On the Sales Order: Status Overview screen, choose the Expand all pushbutton.The following information is displayed for item 10:
Field Name or Data Type Value
Total processing CompletedHeader - Delivery status Not delivered
For item 20, the following information is displayed:
Field Name or Data Type Value
Total processing Being processedHeader - Delivery status Partially delivered
TSCM60_1 Unit 12 Solution 45
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 731/740
SummaryYou should now be able to:
● Use additional functions during sales order processing
TSCM60_1
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 732/740
Which of the following business partners are essential for a sales transaction?
Choose the correct answers.
A. Sold-to party
B. Contact person
C. Ship-to party
D. Forwarding Agent
TSCM60_1 Unit 12
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 733/740
Which of the following business partners are essential for a sales transaction?
A. Sold-to party
C. Ship-to party
TSCM60_1 Unit 12
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 734/740
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
"The shipping conditions of a sales order are copied fromthe...."
TSCM60_1 Unit 12
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 735/740
Determine whether this statement is true or false.
"The shipping conditions of a sales order are copied fromthe...."True
TSCM60_1 Unit 12
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 736/740
During the determination of the delivering plant, the system checks the _______ first.
Choose the correct answer.
A. Customer Material Information Record
B. Customer Master Record
C. Material Master Record
TSCM60_1 Unit 12
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 737/740
During the determination of the delivering plant, the system checks the _______ first.
A. Customer Material Information Record
TSCM60_1 Unit 12
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 738/740
On which levels can a billing block be set in a sales document?
Choose the correct answers.
A. Header level
B. Item level
C. Schedule line level
TSCM60_1 Unit 12
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 739/740
On which levels can a billing block be set in a sales document?
A. Header level
B. Item level
TSCM60_1 Unit 12
8/18/2019 Tscm60 1 en Col10 Ilt Fv Show
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/tscm60-1-en-col10-ilt-fv-show 740/740